Sie sind auf Seite 1von 220

SAFE BERTHING

AND MOORING

Trelleborg Marine Systems


A–2

Four key brands

Trelleborg Marine Systems is part of


FENTEK
Trelleborg’s Engineered Systems Business High-performance and innovative
fenders used by leading ports
Area and specialises in the safe berthing
worldwide and the most advanced
and mooring of vessels within ports and vessels afloat.
harbours, on offshore structures and in
waterways around the world. We bring
together the industry’s best known and
respected brands for fendering and
mooring systems with the unrivalled
collective experience and knowledge of its SEAWARD
Specialists in closed-cell foam and
sales and engineering staff. polyurethane technology for fenders,
buoys and security barriers, also
Our customers benefit from great advanced construction plastics
choice and helpful support at every stage including Ecoboard.

from initial concept and detailed design


right through to supply, commissioning
and after-sales service – all provided by
our network of regional offices and local
agents.
TRELLEX FENDER
Versatile modular fender systems
and accessories, general purpose
fenders and solutions for tugs and
workboats.

HARBOUR MARINE
Global leaders for integrated vessel
docking, mooring and monitoring
systems including quick release
hooks, berthing aids, electronic
monitoring systems and software.

© Trelleborg AB, 2008

M1100, version 1.1-EN


A–3

CONTENTS

1 2 3

High-performance Fenders Modular Fenders Multi-purpose Fenders

4 5 6

Pneumatic and Rolling Fenders Foam Fenders and Buoys Engineered Plastics

7 8 9

Tug Fenders Safety Products Accessories

10 11 12

Bollards Harbour Marine Fender Design

© Trelleborg AB, 2008

M1100, version 1.1-EN


High Performance
Fenders
Section 1

Trelleborg Marine Systems


Super Cone
SCK Cell
Parallel Motion
Unit Elements
www.trelleborg.com/marine Arch Fenders
Corner Arch
Ref. M1100-S01-V1.2-EN
1–2

PIANC TYPE APPROVAL


PIANC is a worldwide non-political and non-
profit technical and scientific organization
of national governments, corporations and PIANC contact details
private individuals. PIANC’s objective is to
promote both inland and maritime navigation General Secretariat
by fostering progress in the planning, design, Bâtiment Graaf de Ferraris, 11th floor
construction, improvement, maintenance and Blvd. du Roi Albert II, 20, PO Box 3
operation of inland and maritime waterways B-1000 Brussels
and ports and of coastal areas for general use Belgium
in industrialised and industrialising countries.
PIANC was founded in 1885 and is the Tel: +32 2 553 71 61
oldest international association concerned Fax: +32 2 553 71 55
with these technical aspects of navigation. It info@pianc-aipcn.org
has made – and continues to make – a vital www.pianc.org
contribution to technical development in this
field. PIANC’s members form an active world-
wide network of professionals in the field of
inland and maritime navigation and ports.
Trelleborg Marine Systems is a corporate
member of PIANC.

Type Approval certificate Fatigue test certificate

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN.

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–3

PIANC TYPE APPROVAL


Trelleborg is committed to providing
high quality products. Consistency
and performance are routinely
checked in accordance with the
latest procedures and test protocols.
PIANC has introduced new
methods and procedures for
testing the performance of solid
rubber fenders, allowing for real
world operating conditions, in their
document ‘Guidelines for the
Design of Fender Systems: 2002:
Appendix A’.
Trelleborg has achieved PIANC
Type Approval for the following
fender types:

B Super Cone
B SCK Cell
B Unit Element
B AN Arch
B ANP Arch

Verification testing of SCK 3000


PIANC Type Approval brings the
following benefits:
Testing is carried out in two stages: to prove behaviour of the generic fender
B proven product quality type, and then to confirm that performance of fenders made for each project
B tests simulate real operating meet the required performances.
conditions
B longer service life Type Approval testing (Stage 1) Verification testing (Stage 2)
B lower maintenance PIANC Type Approval testing is CV method verification testing
B greater reliability carried out to determine the effects is routinely carried out on all
B reduced lifetime costs of environmental factors on the significant orders to confirm the
B manufacturer commitment performance of various fender types. Rated Performance Data (RPD) of
B excludes unsafe ‘copy’ and ‘fake’ Trelleborg’s Type Approval tests are Trelleborg’s PIANC Type Approved
fenders witnessed by Germanischer Lloyd. fenders. Results are normalised to
B simplifies contract specifications 0.15m/s compression speed,
23°C temperature and 0°
compression angle.

Fatigue testing of SCN fender Speed testing of AN fender

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN.

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–4

SUPER
CONE
FENDERS
Super Cones are the latest
generation of ‘cell’ fender, with
optimal performance and efficiency.
The conical body shape makes
the SCN very stable even at large
compression angles, and provides
excellent shear strength. With
overload stops the Super Cone
is even more resistant to over-
compression.

Features
B Highly efficient geometry
B No performance loss even at large
berthing angles
B Stable shape resists shear
B Wide choice of rubber compounds

Applications
B General cargo berths
B Bulk terminals
B Oil and LNG facilities
B Container berths
B RoRo and cruise terminals
B Parallel motion systems
B Monopiles and dolphins

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–5

SUPER CONE FENDERS


Anchors/
H ØW V ØU C D ØB ØS Zmin Weight
Head bolts
SCN 300 300 500 – 295 27–37 20–25 440 255 4 × M20 45 40
SCN 350 350 570 – 330 27–37 20–25 510 275 4 × M20 52 50
SCN 400 400 650 – 390 30–40 20–28 585 340 4 × M24 60 76
SCN 500 500 800 – 490 32–42 30–38 730 425 4 × M24 75 160
SCN 550 550 880 – 540 32–42 30–38 790 470 4 × M24 82 210
SCN 600 600 960 – 590 40–52 35–42 875 515 4 × M30 90 270
SCN 700 700 1120 – 685 40–52 35–42 1020 600 4 × M30 105 411
SCN 800 800 1280 – 785 40–52 35–42 1165 685 6 × M30 120 606
SCN 900 900 1440 – 885 40–52 35–42 1313 770 6 × M30 135 841
SCN 950 950 1520 1440 930 40–52 40–50 1390 815 6 × M30 142 980
SCN 1000 1000 1600 – 980 50–65 40–50 1460 855 6 × M36 150 1125
SCN 1050 1050 1680 – 1030 50–65 45–55 1530 900 6 × M36 157 1360
SCN 1100 1100 1760 – 1080 50–65 50–58 1605 940 8 × M36 165 1567
SCN 1200 1200 1920 – 1175 57–80 50–58 1750 1025 8 × M42 180 2028
SCN 1300 1300 2080 – 1275 65–90 50–58 1900 1100 8 × M48 195 2455
SCN 1400 1400 2240 2180 1370 65–90 60–70 2040 1195 8 × M48 210 3105
SCN 1600 1600 2560 2390 1570 65–90 70–80 2335 1365 8 × M48 240 4645
SCN 1800 1800 2880 2700 1765 75–100 70–80 2625 1540 10 × M56 270 6618
SCN 2000 2000 3200 – 1955 80–105 90–105 2920 1710 10 × M56 300 9560
[ Units: mm, kg ]

ØB Z H
D
ØS

ØW ØU

Overload stop

V
Some SCN sizes have a modified
flange for reduced shipping
dimensions.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–6

SUPER CONE FENDERS


Rated Performance Data (RPD)*

E0.9 E1.0 E1.1 E1.2 E1.3 E1.4 E1.5 E1.6 E1.7 E1.8 E1.9 E2.0
ER 7.7 8.6 8.9 9.2 9.5 9.8 10.1 10.4 10.6 10.9 11.2 11.5
SCN 300
RR 59 65 67 68 70 72 74 75 77 79 80 82
ER 12.5 13.9 14.4 14.8 15.3 15.7 16.2 16.7 17.1 17.6 18 18 5
SCN 350
RR 80 89 91 93 96 98 100 102 104 107 109 111
ER 18.6 20.7 21.4 22.1 22.8 23.5 24.2 24.8 25.5 26.2 26.9 27.6
SCN 400
RR 104 116 119 122 125 128 131 133 136 139 142 145
ER 36.5 40.5 41.9 43.2 44.6 45.9 47.3 48.6 50 51.3 52.7 54
SCN 500
RR 164 182 187 191 196 200 205 209 214 218 223 227
ER 49 54 56 58 59 61 63 65 67 68 70 72
SCN 550
RR 198 220 226 231 237 242 248 253 259 264 270 275
ER 63 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 84 86 88 90
SCN 600
RR 225 250 257 263 270 276 283 289 296 302 309 315
ER 117 130 134 137 141 144 148 151 155 158 162 165
SCN 700
RR 320 355 365 374 384 393 403 412 422 431 441 450
ER 171 190 196 201 207 212 218 223 229 234 240 245
SCN 800
RR 419 465 478 490 503 515 528 540 553 565 578 590
ER 248 275 282 289 296 303 310 317 324 331 338 345
SCN 900
RR 527 585 601 617 633 649 665 681 697 713 729 745
ER 291 322 331 339 348 356 364 373 381 390 398 407
SCN 950
RR 588 653 671 688 706 724 742 759 777 795 813 830
ER 338 375 385 395 405 415 425 435 445 455 465 475
SCN 1000
RR 653 725 745 764 784 803 823 842 862 881 901 920
ER 392 435 447 458 470 481 493 504 516 527 539 550
SCN 1050
RR 720 800 822 843 865 886 908 929 951 972 994 1015
ER 450 500 514 527 541 554 568 581 595 608 622 635
SCN 1100
RR 788 875 899 923 947 971 995 1019 1043 1067 1091 1115
ER 585 650 668 685 703 720 738 755 773 790 808 825
SCN 1200
RR 941 1045 1073 1101 1129 1157 1185 1213 1241 1269 1297 1325
ER 743 825 847 869 891 913 935 957 979 1001 1023 1045
SCN 1300
RR 1103 1225 1258 1291 1324 1357 1390 1423 1456 1489 1522 1555
ER 927 1030 1058 1085 1113 1140 1168 1195 1223 1250 1278 1305
SCN 1400
RR 1278 1420 1459 1497 1536 1574 1613 1651 1690 1728 1767 1805
ER 1382 1535 1577 1618 1660 1701 1743 1784 1826 1867 1909 1950
SCN 1600
RR 1670 1855 1905 1955 2005 2055 2105 2155 2205 2255 2305 2355
ER 1967 2185 2244 2303 2362 2421 2480 2539 2598 2657 2716 2775
SCN 1800
RR 2115 2350 2413 2476 2539 2602 2665 2728 2791 2854 2917 2980
ER 2700 3000 3080 3160 3240 3320 3400 3480 3560 3640 3720 3800
SCN 2000
RR 2610 2900 2978 3056 3134 3212 3290 3368 3446 3524 3602 3680

*in accordance with PIANC. [ Units: kNm, kN ]

120

100

80
Reaction (%)

60 120
100
40 80
Energy (%)

60
20 40
20
0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75
Deflection (%) 72

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–7

SUPER CONE FENDERS


Rated Performance Data (RPD)*

E2.1 E2.2 E2.3 E2.4 E2.5 E2.6 E2.7 E2.8 E2.9 E3.0 E3.1 E/R (å)
ER 11.8 12.1 12.4 12.7 13.0 13.3 13.5 13.8 14.1 14.4 15.9
SCN 300 0.138
RR 84 86 89 91 93 95 97 100 102 104 114
ER 19 19.4 19.9 20.3 20.8 21.3 21.7 22.2 22.6 23.1 25.4
SCN 350 0.163
RR 114 117 120 123 126 129 132 135 138 141 155
ER 28.3 29 29.7 30.4 31 1 31.8 32.5 33.2 33.9 34.6 38.1
SCN 400 0.186
RR 149 153 157 161 165 169 173 177 181 185 204
ER 55.4 56.7 58.1 59.4 60.8 62.2 63.5 64.9 66.2 67.6 74.4
SCN 500 0.232
RR 233 239 246 252 258 264 270 277 283 289 318
ER 74 76 77 79 81 83 85 86 88 90 99
SCN 550 0.256
RR 283 290 298 305 313 320 328 335 343 350 385
ER 93 96 99 102 105 108 111 114 117 120 132
SCN 600 0.290
RR 324 332 341 349 358 366 375 383 392 400 440
ER 169 173 177 181 185 189 193 197 201 205 226
SCN 700 0.364
RR 462 474 486 498 510 522 534 546 558 570 627
ER 252 258 265 271 278 284 291 297 304 310 341
SCN 800 0.414
RR 606 621 637 652 668 683 699 714 730 745 820
ER 355 364 374 383 393 402 412 421 431 440 484
SCN 900 0.466
RR 765 785 805 825 845 865 885 905 925 945 1040
ER 418 429 440 451 463 473 485 496 507 518 570
SCN 950 0.492
RR 853 875 897 919 941 963 986 1008 1030 1052 1158
ER 488 501 514 527 540 553 566 579 592 605 666
SCN 1000 0.518
RR 945 969 994 1018 1043 1067 1092 1116 1141 1165 1282
ER 565 580 595 610 625 640 655 670 685 700 770
SCN 1050 0.544
RR 1042 1069 1096 1123 1150 1177 1204 1231 1258 1285 1414
ER 652 669 686 703 720 737 754 771 788 805 886
SCN 1100 0.571
RR 1145 1174 1204 1233 1263 1292 1322 1351 1381 1410 1551
ER 847 869 891 913 935 957 979 1001 1023 1045 1150
SCN 1200 0.622
RR 1361 1396 1432 1467 1503 1538 1574 1609 1645 1680 1848
ER 1074 1102 1131 1159 1188 1216 1245 1273 1302 1330 1463
SCN 1300 0.674
RR 1597 1638 1680 1721 1763 1804 1846 1887 1929 1970 2167
ER 1341 1376 1412 1447 1483 1518 1554 1589 1625 1660 1826
SCN 1400 0.725
RR 1853 1901 1949 1997 2045 2093 2141 2189 2237 2285 2514
ER 2003 2056 2109 2162 2215 2268 2321 2374 2427 2480 2728
SCN 1600 0.830
RR 2418 2480 2543 2605 2668 2730 2793 2855 2918 2980 3278
ER 2851 2926 3002 3077 3153 3228 3304 3379 3455 3530 3883
SCN 1800 0.932
RR 3060 3139 3219 3298 3378 3457 3537 3616 3696 3775 4153
ER 3904 4008 4112 4216 4320 4424 4528 4632 4736 4840 5324
SCN 2000 1.039
RR 3778 3876 3974 4072 4170 4268 4366 4464 4562 4660 5126

*in accordance with PIANC. [ Units: kNm, kN ]

example
Intermediate deflections

Di (%) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 72 75

Ei (%) 0 1 4 8 15 22 31 40 50 59 67 75 82 89 96 100 106 Ri


Ri (%) 0 19 39 59 75 89 97 100 98 92 84 77 73 77 91 100 118 Ei

Nominal rated deflection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.


Di
PIANC factors (from 3rd party witnessed Type Approval testing)
Angle factor Temperature factor Velocity factor
Angle (°) AF Temperature (°C) TF Time (seconds) VF For steady state deceleration, the
0 1.000 50 0.882 1 1.050 compression time is:
3 1.039
40 0.926 2 1.020 2d
30 0.969 t (seconds) =
3 1.012 Vi
5 1.055 23 1.000
4 1.005 d = fender deflection (mm)
8 1.029 10 1.056
5 1.000 Vi = impact speed (mm/s)
10 1.000 0 1.099
6 1.000
-10 1.143
15 0.856 8 1.000
-20 1.186 If compression time t<4s, please ask.
20 0.739 -30 1.230 ≥10 1.000
Refer to page 1–2 for further information.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–8

SUPER CONE FENDERS


Clearances Weight support
0.75H*

1.0H
WH

Super Cone fenders can support


a lot of static weight. The table is
1.8H a guide to the permitted weight
of front panel before additional
WV
support chains may be required.

Panel weight (kg)


SCN Single or multiple Multiple vertical
horizontal (n ≥ 1) (n ≥ 2)
1.1H E1 WH ≤ n × 1.0 × W WV ≤ n × 1.25 × W
E2 WH ≤ n × 1.3 × W WV ≤ n × 1.625 × W
E3 WH ≤ n × 1.5 × W WV ≤ n × 1.875 × W

n = number of Super Cones. W = Super Cone weight


H 0.15H
WH = panel weight – single or multi-horizontal
WV = panel weight – single or multi-vertical
* does not allow for bow flares Interpolate for other grades.
Refer to TMS when Super Cone direction is reversed.
There must be enough space around and between Super
Cone fenders and the steel panel to allow them to deflect
äC
without interference. Shear
Distances given in the above diagram are for guidance.
If in doubt, please ask.

äS
Tension R

μR
Super Cones are very stable in shear. The table is a guide
F (≤RR)
to maximum shear deflections (äS) for different shear
coefficients (μ) and rubber grades.

Friction coefficients (μ)


äS 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3
If the tensile load exceeds the rated reaction then tension E1 7% 9% 11% 14%
chains may be required. Please ask for advice on the E2 9% 11% 14% 17%
E3 11% 17% 18% 22%
design of tension chains.
äS (max) usually occurs at äC = 0.3H to 0.35H.
For äS ≥ 20%, refer to TMS.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–9

SUPER CONE FENDERS

Proven
in practice

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–10

SCK CELL
FENDERS
SCK Cell fenders have a very long
track record and remain popular
because of their simplicity, high
performance and strength. They
come in a wide range of standard
sizes and are interchangeable with
many older cell fender types.

Features
B High performance
B Can support large panels
B Strong, well-proven design
B Ideal for low hull pressure systems

Applications
B Oil and LNG facilities
B Bulk terminals
B Offshore platforms
B Container berths
B RoRo and cruise terminals
B Multi-user berths

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–11

SCK CELL FENDERS


Dimensions

Anchors/
H ØW ØB D d Weight
head bolts

SCK 400H 400 650 550 25 30 4 × M22 75

SCK 500H 500 650 550 25 32 4 × M24 95

SCK 630H 630 840 700 25 32 4 × M27 220

SCK 800H 800 1050 900 30 40 6 × M30 400

SCK 1000H 1000 1300 1100 35 45 6 × M36 790

SCK 1150H 1150 1500 1300 40 50 6 × M42 1200

SCK 1250H 1250 1650 1450 40 50 6 × M42 1500

SCK 1450H 1450 1850 1650 42 61 6 × M48 2300

SCK 1600H 1600 2000 1800 45 61 8 × M48 3000

SCK 1700H 1700 2100 1900 50 66 8 × M56 3700

SCK 2000H 2000 2200 2000 50 76 8 × M64 5000

SCK 2250H 2250 2550 2300 57 76 10 × M64 7400

SCK 2500H 2500 2950 2700 70 76 10 × M64 10700

SCK 3000H 3000 3350 3150 75 92 12 × M76 18500

[ Units: mm, kg ]

n×d H
D

ØW ØB

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–12

SCK CELL FENDERS


Rated Performance Data (RPD)*

E0.9 E1.0 E1.1 E1.2 E1.3 E1.4 E1.5 E1.6 E1.7 E1.8 E1.9 E2.0
ER 8.8 9.8 10.4 11.0 11.6 12.2 12.7 13.3 13.9 14.5 15.1 15.7
SCK 400H
RR 50.3 55.9 59.4 62.9 66.5 70 73.5 77.1 80.6 84.1 87.7 91.2

ER 16.7 18.6 19.8 20.9 22.1 23.3 24.5 25.7 26.8 28 29.2 30.4
SCK 500H
RR 78.6 87.3 92.8 98.3 104 109 115 120 126 131 137 142

ER 34.4 38.2 40.6 42.9 45.3 47.6 50 52.4 54.7 57.1 59.4 61.8
SCK 630H
RR 124 137 146 155 163 172 180 189 198 206 215 224

ER 67.1 74.5 79.5 84.5 89.5 94.5 99.5 104 109 114 119 124
SCK 800H
RR 190 211 225 240 254 268 283 297 312 326 341 355

ER 138 153 163 172 182 191 201 211 220 230 239 249
SCK 1000H
RR 314 349 371 393 415 437 458 480 502 524 455 568

ER 210 233 248 263 277 292 306 321 336 350 365 379
SCK 1150H
RR 416 462 491 520 548 577 606 635 664 692 721 750

ER 269 299 318 337 355 374 393 411 430 449 468 486
SCK 1250H
RR 491 545 579 614 648 682 716 750 784 818 852 887

ER 421 468 497 526 555 585 614 643 672 702 731 760
SCK 1450H
RR 661 734 781 828 875 922 969 1016 1063 1110 1157 1193

ER 566 629 668 707 746 785 825 864 903 942 982 1021
SCK 1600H
RR 805 894 950 1006 1062 1118 1174 1230 1286 1342 1397 1453

ER 678 753 800 847 895 942 989 1036 1083 1131 1178 1225
SCK 1700H
RR 908 1009 1072 1135 1199 1262 1325 1388 1451 1514 1577 1641

ER 1104 1227 1304 1380 1457 1534 1610 1687 1764 1840 1917 1994
SCK 2000H
RR 1258 1397 1485 1572 1659 1746 1833 1920 2007 2094 2181 2268

ER 1854 2060 2169 2279 2388 2497 2606 2715 2824 2933 3042 3151
SCK 2250H
RR 1876 2085 2195 2309 2416 2527 2637 2747 2858 2968 3079 3189

ER 2544 2826 2976 3026 3275 3425 3575 3724 3874 4024 4173 4323
SCK 2500H
RR 2317 2574 2711 2847 2983 3120 3256 3392 3528 3665 3801 3937

ER 3795 4217 4452 4688 4923 5158 5394 5629 5865 6100 6335 6571
SCK 3000H
RR 3310 3678 3879 4080 4281 4482 4683 4884 5085 5286 5487 5688

*in accordance with PIANC. [ Units: kNm, kN ]

120

100

80
Reaction (%)

60 120

100
40 80
Energy (%)

60
20 40
20
0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
Deflection (%) 52.5

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–13

SCK CELL FENDERS


Rated Performance Data (RPD)*

E2.1 E2.2 E2.3 E2.4 E2.5 E2.6 E2.7 E2.8 E2.9 E3.0 E3.1 E/R (å)
ER 16.2 16.7 17.2 17.7 18.1 18.6 19.1 19.6 20.1 20.6 22.7
SCK 400H
RR 93.8 96.5 99.1 102 104 107 110 112 115 118 129
0.174

ER 31.3 32.2 33 33.9 34.8 35.7 36.6 37.4 38.3 39.2 43.1
SCK 500H
RR 146 151 155 159 163 167 172 176 180 184 203
0.213

ER 63.7 65.5 67.4 69.2 71.1 72.9 74.8 76.7 78.5 80.4 88.4
SCK 630H
RR 230 237 244 250 257 264 270 277 284 290 319
0.277

ER 128 132 136 140 144 147 151 155 159 163 179
SCK 800H
RR 366 377 388 399 409 420 431 442 453 464 510
0.351

ER 256 264 271 279 286 294 301 309 316 324 356
SCK 1000H
RR 585 602 619 636 653 670 687 704 720 737 811
0.438

ER 391 402 413 425 436 447 458 470 481 492 541
SCK 1150H
RR 773 795 818 840 863 886 908 931 953 976 1073
0.505

ER 501 516 530 545 559 574 589 603 618 633 696
SCK 1250H
RR 913 940 967 993 1020 1047 1073 1100 1127 1153 1269
0.548

ER 783 805 828 851 874 897 919 942 965 988 1086
SCK 1450H
RR 1229 1265 1301 1337 1372 1408 1444 1480 1516 1551 1707
0.637

ER 1051 1082 1113 1143 1174 1204 1235 1266 1296 1327 1460
SCK 1600H
RR 1497 1540 1584 1628 1671 1715 1758 1802 1845 1889 2078
0.702

ER 1262 1298 1335 1372 1408 1445 1482 1518 1555 1592 1751
SCK 1700H
RR 1690 1739 1788 1837 1886 1935 1985 2034 2083 2132 2345
0.746

ER 2054 2113 2173 2233 2293 2353 2412 2472 2532 2592 2851
SCK 2000H
RR 2336 2403 2470 2538 2605 2673 2740 2807 2875 2942 3236
0.879

ER 3245 3340 3435 3529 3624 3718 3813 3907 4002 4096 4506
SCK 2250H
RR 3285 3381 3476 3572 3668 3763 3859 3955 4051 4146 4561
0.988

ER 4452 4582 4712 4841 4971 5101 5230 5360 5490 5619 6181
SCK 2500H
RR 4056 4174 4292 4410 4528 4647 4765 4883 5001 5119 5631
1.098

ER 6761 6952 7143 7334 7525 7716 7906 8097 8288 8479 9327
SCK 3000H
RR 5856 6023 6191 6358 6526 6693 6860 7028 7195 7363 8099
1.152

*in accordance with PIANC. [ Units: kNm, kN ]

example
Intermediate deflections

Di (%) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 52.5 55
Ri
Ei (%) 0 2 7 16 26 38 50 61 72 83 94 100 106
Ri (%) 0 32 60 81 94 99 99 96 92 92 96 100 106 Ei
Nominal rated deflection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
Di
PIANC factors (from 3rd party witnessed Type Approval testing)

Angle factor Temperature factor Velocity factor


Angle (°) AF Temperature (°C) TF Time (seconds) VF For steady state deceleration, the
0 1.000 50 0.882 1 1.005 compression time is:
3 0.977
40 0.926 2 1.002 2d
30 0.969 t (seconds) =
3 1.001 Vi
5 0.951 23 1.000
4 1.001 d = fender deflection (mm)
8 0.909 10 1.056
5 1.000 Vi = impact speed (mm/s)
10 0.883 0 1.099
6 1.000
-10 1.143
15 0.810 8 1.000
-20 1.186 If compression time t<4s, please ask.
20 0.652 -30 1.230 ≥10 1.000
Refer to page 1–2 for further information.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–14

SCK CELL FENDERS


Clearances Weight support

0.6H*

WH

WV

A Cell fenders can support a lot of static weight. The table


is a guide to the permitted weight of front panel before
additional support chains may be required.
Single or multiple Multiple vertical
SCK H
horizontal (n≥1) (n≥2)
H E1 WH ≤ n × 1.0 × W WV ≤ n × 1.25 × W
E2 WH ≤ n × 1.3 × W WV ≤ n × 1.75 × W ≤800
* does not allow for bow flares E3 WH ≤ n × 1.5 × W WV ≤ n × 2.25 × W
E1 WH ≤ n × 11 × W0.6 WV ≤ n × 13.75 × W0.6
E2 WH ≤ n × 19 × W0.6 WV ≤ n × 23.75 × W0.6 ≥1000
E3 WH ≤ n × 25 × W0.6 WV ≤ n × 31.25 × W0.6
There must be enough space around and between the
Cell fenders and the steel panel to allow them to deflect n = number of Cell fenders. W = SCK weight
without interference. WH = panel weight – single or multi-horizontal
Distances given in the above diagram are for guidance. WV = panel weight – single or multi-vertical
If in doubt, please ask. Interpolate for other grades

SCK (H) Edge (A) Centres (B) Tension


400 480 700
500 510 700
630 600 880
800 700 1120
1000 850 1500
1150 990 1730 F (≤RR)
1250 1060 1870
1450 1200 2180
1600 1270 2400
1700 1470 2550
2000 1560 2880
2250 1710 3360 If the tensile load exceeds the rated reaction then tension
2500 1910 3730 chains may be required. Please ask for advice on the
3000 2240 4500 design of tension chains.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–15

SCK CELL FENDERS

Proven
in practice

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–16

PARALLEL
MOTION
FENDERS
Parallel Motion technology can
reduce reaction forces by up to 60%
compared with traditional designs.
The panel always remains vertical
but can cope with large berthing
angles – even at 20° there is usually
no loss in energy absorption.

Features
B Ultra-low reaction
B Non-tilt frontal panel
B No performance loss at large
berthing angles
B Easy and fast to install
B Minimal maintenance

Applications
B RoRo and fast ferry berths
B LNG and tanker terminals
B Naval facilities
B High tidal zones
B Monopile or ‘soft’ structures

Increasing energy,
reducing reaction
By using two Super Cones
back-to-back, the deflection
and energy both increase
whilst reaction forces stay low.
Reduced loads compared to
conventional fenders mean
less stress in the structure,
allowing smaller piles and less
concrete to be used.
As Parallel Motion Fenders
are mostly preassembled
in the factory, installation is
simple and fast. Maintenance
is minimal too – contributing
to the low service life cost of
Parallel Motion technology.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–17

PARALLEL MOTION FENDERS


Comparison of PMF and conventional fenders
3500
E (kNm) R (kN)
3000
Type 0° 10° 20° RPD å20 Super Cone

Parallel Motion Fender 2500 Parallel Motion Fender

Reaction (kN)
1957 1957 1957 1848 100%
PMF1200 (E3.1 & E1.9) 2000 Cell Fender
Super Cone 1500
1958 1958 1449 3147 43%
2 × SCN1200 (E2.7) 1000
Cell Fender 500
1930 1704 1258 3032 39%
2 × SCK1450 (E2.9)
0
0 400 800 1200 1600
ε20 = Relative Efficiency at 20° angle compared to PMF
Deflection (mm)

1 Rubber fender units


Shown here are two Super Cones mounted in
a back-to-back ‘Twin-Series’ configuration.

2 Closed box panel (frame)


Fully sealed, pressure tested design. Shown
with optional lead-in bevels which are
designed to suit each case.
6
3 Torsion tube and arm assembly
Also closed-box construction, the tube and
arms keep the panel vertical whatever level
impact loads are applied.

4 Hinge units
The maintenance-free stainless steel pins
4
and spherical Trelleborg Orkot® bearings
5 allow free rotation to accommodate berthing
angles, also eliminating moments in the
hinge pin.
7
5 UHMW-PE face pads
1
Trelleborg ‘Double Sintered’ UHMW-PE face
pads are standard to minimise friction and
maximise service intervals.
2
6 Check chains
3
Check chains (optional) act as rope deflectors
to stop ropes from snagging, and to help with
some large angle berthings.

7 Pile jackets (optional)


Purpose designed for every project, pile
jackets are factory built for a perfect fit to
the fender on-site. They can strengthen the
structure and double as a corrosion barrier in
the vulnerable splash zone. Jackets are also
available for monopile systems.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–18

PARALLEL MOTION FENDERS


Twin-Series Super Cone Single Super Cone MV and MI Element PMF

E (kNm) R (kN) E (kNm) R (kN) E (kNm) R (kN)


SCN 400 47–65 149–204 SCN 400 19–38 104–204 MV 400 52–75 284–406
SCN 500 92–127 233–318 SCN 500 36–74 164–318 MV 500 82–117 356–508
SCN 550 122–169 283–385 SCN 550 49–99 198–385
MV 550 99–141 391–558
SCN 600 156–220 324–440 SCN 600 63–132 225–440
MV 600 118–168 427–610
SCN 700 286–387 462–627 SCN 700 117–226 320–627
SCN 800 423–581 606–820 SCN 800 171–341 419–820 MV 750 183–262 533–762

SCN 900 602–822 765–1040 SCN 900 248–484 527–1040 MV 800 210–300 568–812

SCN 1000 826–1131 945–1282 SCN 1000 338–666 653–1282 MV 1000 328–468 711–1016
SCN 1050 957–1309 1042–1414 SCN 1050 392–770 720–1414 MV 1250 511–730 889–1270
SCN 1100 1102–1507 1145–1551 SCN 1100 450–886 788–1551
MV 1450 687–982 1030–1472
SCN 1200 1432–1957 1361–1848 SCN 1200 585–1150 971–1848
MV 1600 837–1196 1138–1626
SCN 1300 1816–2486 1597–2167 SCN 1300 743–1463 1103–2167
MI 2000 1295–1850 1295–1850
SCN 1400 2268–3104 1853–2514 SCN 1400 927–1826 1278–2514
SCN 1600 3385–4367 2418–3278 SCN 1600 1382–2728 1670–3278 MV and MI Elements are not PIANC Type
Approved. Performances are based on a
SCN 1800 4817–6599 3060–4153 SCN 1800 1967–3883 2115–4253
pair of 1000mm long elements. Pro-rata
SCN 2000 6609–9044 3778–5126 SCN 2000 2700–5324 2610–5216
for more elements or different lengths.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–19

PARALLEL MOTION FENDERS

Proven
in practice

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–20

UNIT
ELEMENTS
Unit Elements are high-performance,
PIANC Type Approved modular rubber
fenders. Elements are versatile
and can be combined in unlimited
combinations of length and direction.
The simplest Unit Element system
is the UE-V fender, with pairs of
legs and a UHMW-PE non-marking
shield. For heavy duty applications
Unit Elements are combined with a
steel panel (frame) which can cope
with belting, bow flares, low hull
pressures and high tides.

Features
B PIANC Type Approved
B Versatile modular system
B Highly efficient shape
B Symmetrical or asymmetrical fixings
B Strong in lengthwise shear
B Easy to install
B Low maintenance

Applications
B Container terminals
B Tanker Berths
B RoRo and cruise ships
B Dolphins and monopiles
B Bulk and general cargo berths
B Fender walls
B Small craft berths

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–21

UNIT ELEMENTS
Element H A B* C* D F J M W K E Anchors Weight
UE250 250 109 114 71 20–27 152 33 25–35 218 50 300 M20 38
UE300 300 130 138 84 23–32 184 38 30–40 260 50 300 M24 54
UE400 400 165 187 102 25–35 248 41 30–40 330 250 500 M24 89
UE500 500 195 229 119 28–37 306 42 40–52 390 250 500 M30 135
UE550 550 210 252 126 32–38 336 42 40–52 420 250 500 M30 153
UE600 600 225 275 133 35–45 366 42 40–52 450 250 500 M30 179
UE700 700 270 321 163 35–45 428 56 50–65 540 250 500 M36 247
UE750 750 285 344 170 38–45 458 56 50–65 570 250 500 M36 298
UE800 800 300 366 178 38–45 488 56 50–65 600 250 500 M36 338
UE900 900 335 412 198 42–50 550 60 57–80 670 250 500 M42 410
UE1000 1000 365 458 212 46–58 610 60 57–80 730 250 500 M42 509
UE1200 1200 435 557 252 46–60 748 61 65–90 870 250 500 M48 717
UE1400 1400 495 642 281 50–65 856 67 65–90 990 250 500 M48 948
UE1600 1600 565 733 321 50–65 978 76 75–100 1130 250 500 M56 1236
* Asymmetrical bolting version only. [ Units: mm, kg/m ]

2000L Asymmetrical bolting


1500L
1000L
J

Symmetrical bolting
H
D
K E E E K J
A

F W

J
Element lengths

bH L` 600 750 900 1000 1200 1400 1500 1800 2000 Max
UE 250 { z { z { { z { z 2800
UE 300 { z { z { { z { z 2000
UE 400 z { z { { z { z 2000
UE 500–UE 550 z { z { { z 1500
UE 600–UE 800 z { z { { z { z 2000
UE 900–UE 1200 { z { { z 1500
UE 1400 { z { { z { z 2000
UE 1600 z { { z { z 2000
z preferred lengths For elements with L/H < 1.0 or non-standard lengths,
{ typical non-standard lengths please ask for advice.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–22

UNIT ELEMENTS

Rated Performance Data (RPD)*

E0.9 E1.0 E1.1 E1.2 E1.3 E1.4 E1.5 E1.6 E1.7 E1.8 E1.9 E2.0
ER 8.1 9.0 9.3 9.6 9.9 10.2 10.5 10.8 11.1 11.4 11.7 12.0
UE 250
RR 79 88 90 93 95 98 100 103 106 108 111 113
ER 11.7 13.0 13.4 13.8 14.2 14.6 15.0 15.4 15.8 16.2 16.6 17.0
UE 300
RR 95 105 108 111 114 117 121 124 127 130 133 136
ER 21 23 24 24 25 26 27 27 28 29 29 30
UE 400
RR 113 126 130 134 137 141 145 149 153 156 160 164
ER 32.4 36 37.1 38.2 39.3 40.4 41.5 42.6 43.7 44.8 45.9 47
UE 500
RR 142 158 163 167 172 177 182 186 191 196 200 205
ER 40 44 45 47 48 49 51 52 53 54 56 57
UE 550
RR 157 174 179 184 190 195 200 205 210 216 221 226
ER 47 52 54 55 57 58 60 62 63 65 66 68
UE 600
RR 171 190 196 201 207 212 218 224 229 235 240 246
ER 63 70 72 74 77 79 81 83 85 88 90 92
UE 700
RR 199 221 228 234 241 247 254 261 267 274 280 287
ER 73 81 84 86 89 91 94 96 99 101 104 106
UE 750
RR 214 238 245 252 259 266 274 281 288 295 302 309
ER 84 93 96 99 101 104 107 110 113 115 118 121
UE 800
RR 228 253 261 268 276 283 291 299 306 314 321 329
ER 106 118 122 125 129 132 136 139 143 146 150 153
UE 900
RR 256 284 293 301 310 318 327 336 344 353 361 370
ER 131 146 150 155 159 163 168 172 176 180 185 189
UE 1000
RR 284 316 326 335 345 354 364 373 383 392 402 411
ER 186 207 213 220 226 232 239 245 251 257 264 270
UE 1200
RR 340 378 389 401 412 424 435 446 458 469 481 492
ER 257 286 294 303 311 320 328 336 345 353 362 370
UE 1400
RR 398 442 455 469 482 495 509 552 535 548 562 575
ER 337 374 385 396 407 418 429 440 451 462 473 484
UE 1600
RR 455 506 521 535 552 567 582 597 612 628 643 658

* In accordance with PIANC. [ Units: kNm, kN ]


Values are for a single element, 1000mm long.

120

100

80
Reaction (%)

60 120
100
40 80
Energy (%)

60
20 40
20
0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
Deflection (%) 57.5

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–23

UNIT ELEMENTS

Rated Performance Data (RPD)*

E2.1 E2.2 E2.3 E2.4 E2.5 E2.6 E2.7 E2.8 E2.9 E3.0 E3.1 E/R
ER 12.3 12.6 12.9 13.2 13.5 13.8 14.1 14.4 14.7 15.0 16.5
UE 250
RR 117 120 124 127 131 134 138 141 145 148 163
0.103

ER 17.5 180 18.5 19.0 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 22.0 24.2
UE 300
RR 140 144 149 153 157 161 165 170 174 178 196
0.124

ER 31 32 33 34 35 35 36 37 38 39 43
UE 400
RR 169 174 179 184 189 194 199 204 209 214 235
0.183

ER 48.5 50 51.5 53 54.5 56 57.5 59 60.5 62 68.2


UE 500
RR 211 217 224 230 236 242 248 255 261 267 294
0.230

ER 59 61 62 64 66 68 70 71 73 75 83
UE 550
RR 233 240 246 253 260 267 274 280 287 294 323
0.254

ER 70 72 74 76 79 81 83 85 87 89 98
UE 600
RR 253 261 268 276 283 290 298 305 313 320 352
0.276

ER 95 98 100 103 106 109 112 114 117 120 132


UE 700
RR 296 305 313 322 331 340 349 357 366 375 413
0.319

ER 109 112 115 118 122 125 128 131 134 137 151
UE 750
RR 318 328 337 347 356 365 375 384 394 403 443
0.341

ER 125 128 132 135 139 143 146 150 153 157 173
UE 800
RR 339 349 358 368 378 388 398 407 417 427 470
0.368

ER 158 162 167 171 176 181 185 190 194 199 219
UE 900
RR 381 392 403 414 426 437 448 459 470 481 529
0.414

ER 195 200 206 212 218 223 229 235 240 246 271
UE 1000
RR 423 436 448 460 473 485 497 509 522 534 587
0.461

ER 278 286 294 302 311 319 327 335 343 351 386
UE 1200
RR 507 522 537 552 567 582 597 612 627 642 706
0.548

ER 381 392 404 415 426 437 448 460 471 482 530
UE 1400
RR 592 610 627 644 662 679 696 713 731 748 823
0.645
ER 499 513 528 542 557 572 586 601 615 630 693
UE 1600
RR 678 697 717 736 756 776 795 815 834 854 939
0.737

* In accordance with PIANC. [ Units: kNm, kN ]


Values are for a single element, 1000mm long.

example
Intermediate deflections

D(%) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 57.5 62.5


Ri
E(%) 0 1 5 12 21 32 43 54 65 75 84 95 100 113
R(%) 0 23 47 69 87 97 100 97 90 85 84 92 100 121 Ei
Nominal rated deflection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
Di
PIANC factors (from 3rd party witnessed Type Approval testing)

Angle factor* Temperature factor Velocity factor


Angle (°) AF Temperature (°C) TF Time (seconds) VF For steady state deceleration, the
0 1.000 50 0.882 1 1.020 compression time is:
3 0.960
40 0.926 2 1.008 2d
30 0.969 t (seconds) =
3 1.005 Vi
5 0.936 23 1.000
4 1.003 d = fender deflection (mm)
8 0.901 10 1.056
5 1.002 Vi = impact speed (mm/s)
10 0.878 0 1.099
6 1.001
-10 1.143
15 0.818 8 1.000
-20 1.186 If compression time t<4s, please ask.
20 0.755 -30 1.230 ≥10 1.000
Refer to page 1–2 for further information.
* G/H = 0.7 (see page 1–24); D1 = 57.5% (refer to website for full angular tables).

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–24

UE SYSTEMS
Clearances Weight support capacity
H H
0.65H†

2P L

L
2P

G P
WH WV

P
Unit Element fenders can support a lot of weight. The
table is a guide to the permitted weight of front panel
before additional support chains may be required.

P Panel weight (kg)


UE Single or multiple Single or multiple
horizontal (n ≥ 1) vertical (n ≥ 1)
E1 WH ≤ n × 690 × H × L WV ≤ n × 1230 × H × L
E2 WH ≤ n × 900 × H × L WV ≤ n × 1600 × H × L
E3 WH ≤ n × 1170 × H × L WV ≤ n × 2080 × H × L
2P*
n = number of element pairs
WH = panel weight – elements ‘V’ on elevation
WV = panel weight – elements ‘V’ on plan
H Interpolate for other grades

Element Pmin
UE 250 – UE 300 30
Fenders in tension
UE 400 – UE 1600 50

[ Units: mm ]

There must be enough space around and between Unit


Element fenders and the steel panel to allow them to
deflect without interference. F
Distances given in the above diagram are for guidance.
If in doubt, please ask.

* Always check edge distances to suit concrete grade and


reinforcement. If the tensile load exceeds the rated reaction then tension
† Dimension does no allow for bow flares, berthing angles chains may be required. Please ask for advice on the
or other effects which may reduce clearances. design of tension chains.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–25

UE SYSTEMS

Proven
in practice

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–26

Type V1
UE V-FENDERS
Pairs of Unit Elements can be ( 4
combined with a UHMW-PE shield -
into a V-shape to make a simple,
economical and multi-purpose
fender. The shield can be narrow
or wide, and can also span several ) 1
pairs of elements to make very long 5
fenders. Please ask for advice about Type V2
UE-V fenders which use UE 900 or
larger elements.

( 4
Features
B Simple, modular design -
B Low-friction shield
B Non-marking face
B Reduced hull pressure )
B Easy maintenance 5
1
Type V3

Applications
B Multi-user berths
B Small RoRo terminals
B Workboat berths ( 4
B Pontoon fenders
-

Element Pmin
UE 250 – UE 300 30
UE 400 – UE 1600 50 )
5
[ Units: mm ]

Type V1 Type V2 Type V3


H S G S G S G P T Anchors
UE 250 250 250 250 460 250 460 460 30 70 M20
UE 300 300 290 290 550 290 550 550 30 70 M24
UE 400 400 370 370 690 370 690 690 50 80 M24
UE 500 500 440 440 830 440 830 830 50 90 M30
UE 550 550 470 470 890 470 890 890 50 90 M30
UE 600 600 500 500 950 500 950 950 50 90 M30
UE 700 700 590 590 1130 590 1130 1130 50 100 M36
UE 750 750 620 620 1190 620 1190 1190 50 100 M36
UE 800 800 640 640 1230 640 1230 1230 50 100 M36

[ Units: mm ]

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–27

UE V-FENDERS

Proven
in practice

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–28

ARCH
FENDERS
Arch fenders are simple and rugged,
providing reliable and trouble-free
service for a wide variety of berths
even under the most severe
conditions. The AN-fender is a
traditional rubber faced unit whilst
the ANP-fender can be fitted with
either UHMW-PE face pads or
connected to a steel panel.

Features
B Simple one-piece design
B Strong and hard wearing
B Excellent shear performance
B Large range of standard sizes

Applications
B RoRo berths
B General cargo
B Workboat harbours
B Barge and tug berths

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–29

ARCH FENDERS
Weight
Lmax H A B W F D K E P×Q Anchors AN ANP
AN / ANP 150 3000 150 108 240 326 98 16–20 50 500 20 × 40 M16 28 35
AN / ANP 200 3000 200 142 320 422 130 18–25 50 500 25 × 50 M20 48 62
AN / ANP 250 3500 250 164 400 500 163 20–30 62.5 500 28 × 56 M24 69 90
AN / ANP 300 3500 300 194 480 595 195 25–32 75 500 28 × 56 M24 107 128
AN / ANP 400 3500 400 266 640 808 260 25–32 100 500 35 × 70 M30 185 217
AN / ANP 500 3500 500 318 800 981 325 25–32 125 500 42 × 84 M36 278 352
AN / ANP 600 3000 600 373 960 1160 390 28–40 150 500 48 × 96 M42 411 488
AN / ANP 800 3000 800 499 1300 1550 520 41–50 200 500 54 × 108 M48 770 871
AN / ANP 1000 3000 1000 580 1550 1850 650 50–62 250 500 54 × 108 M48 1289 1390

[Units: mm, kg/m ]

AN Arch fender H
D
K E E K

B W F

ANP Arch fender


X Y Q

P
T

V
C
U

L (≤Lmax)

UHMW-PE face pads Steel frame


L Anchors
U V C X Y T Bolt size X Y
ANP 150 49 0 20–30 60–70 330–410 30 M16 70–90 250–300 1000 6 No
ANP 200 65 0 30–45 60–70 330–410 30 M16 70–90 250–300
ANP 250 45 73 30–45 70–85 330–410 30 M16 70–90 250–300 1500 8 No
ANP 300 50 95 30–45 70–85 330–410 40 M16 70–90 250–300 2000 10 No
ANP 400 60 140 30–50 70–85 330–410 40 M16 70–90 250–300
ANP 500 65 195 30–50 70–85 330–410 50 M20 70–90 250–300 2500 12 No
ANP 600 65 260 35–60 70–85 330–410 50 M20 70–90 250–300 3000 14 No
ANP 800 70 380 50–70 70–85 330–410 60 M24 70–90 250–300
ANP 1000 80 490 50–70 70–85 330–410 60 M24 70–90 250–300 3500 16 No

Larger bolts are required when connecting ANP fenders to [Units: mm ] Non-standard lengths, profiles and
steel panels. Refer to TMS. bolting patterns are available on request.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–30

AN FENDER
Rated Performance Data (RPD)*
160
E1.0 E1.5 E2.0 E2.5 E3.0
ER 4.3 5.0 5.6 6.5 7.4
140 AN 150
RR 74.0 85.1 96.2 112 127
ER 7.6 8.8 10.0 11.6 13.1
AN 200
120 RR 98.6 113 128 149 169
ER 11.9 13.8 15.6 18.1 20.5
AN 250
RR 123 142 160 186 211
100
ER 17.1 19.8 22.5 26.0 29.5
AN 300
Reaction (%)

RR 148 170 192 223 253


80 ER 30.5 35.3 40.0 46.3 52.5
AN 400
RR 197 227 256 297 338
60 120 ER 47.6 55.0 62.4 72.2 82.0
AN 500
RR 247 284 321 372 422
100
ER 68.6 79.3 89.9 103 116
AN 600

Energy (%)
40 80 RR 296 341 385 446 507
60 ER 122 141 160 185 210
AN 800
20 40 RR 394 454 513 594 675
20 ER 191 221 250 289 328
AN 1000
RR 493 567 641 743 844
0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 *In Accordance with PIANC. [ Units: kN, kNm ]
Deflection (%) 51.5% Performance per metre length.

example
Intermediate deflections

Di (%) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 51.5 55

Ei (%) 0 1 6 14 25 37 50 63 74 85 96 100 111 Ri


Ei
Ri (%) 0 24 51 73 89 98 100 96 89 82 91 100 141

Nominal rated deflection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35. Di

PIANC factors (from 3rd party witnessed Type Approval testing)

Angle factor Temperature factor Velocity factor


Angle (°) AF Temperature (°C) TF Time (seconds) VF For steady state deceleration, the
0 1.000 50 0.882 1 1.014 compression time is:
3 0.963
40 0.926 2 1.005 2d
30 0.969 t (seconds) =
3 1.004 Vi
5 0.952 23 1.000
4 1.003 d = fender deflection (mm)
8 0.939 10 1.056
5 1.003 Vi = impact speed (mm/s)
10 0.924 0 1.099
6 1.002
-10 1.143
15 0.817 8 1.000
-20 1.186 If compression time t<4s, please ask.
20 0.535 -30 1.230 ≥10 1.000
Refer to page 1–2 for further information.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–31

ANP FENDER
Rated Performance Data (RPD)*
140
E1.0 E1.5 E2.0 E2.5 E3.0
ER 5.6 6.5 7.3 8.4 9.5
ANP 150
120 RR 88.8 102 115 133 150
ER 9.9 11.4 13 14.9 16.8
ANP 200
RR 118 136 154 177 200
100 ER 15.6 17.9 20.2 23.3 26.3
ANP 250
RR 148 170 192 221 250
Reaction (%)

ER 22.4 25.8 29.1 33.5 37.8


80 ANP 300
RR 178 205 231 266 300
140 ER 39.8 45.8 51.7 59.5 67.2
ANP 400
60 120 RR 237 273 308 354 400
ER 62.1 71.5 80.8 92.9 105
100 ANP 500
RR 296 341 385 443 500
40 80 ER 89.3 103 116 134 151

Energy (%)
ANP 600
60 RR 355 409 462 531 600
ER 159 183 207 238 269
20 40 ANP 800
RR 473 544 615 708 800
20 ER 249 286 323 372 420
ANP 1000
RR 592 681 769 885 1000
0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 *In Accordance with PIANC. [ Units: kN, kNm ]
Deflection (%) 54% Performance per metre length.

example
Intermediate deflections

Di (%) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 54 57.5
Ri
Ei (%) 0 1 6 13 23 34 46 58 70 81 91 100 110
Ei
Ri (%) 0 23 49 71 87 96 100 98 92 84 84 100 139

Nominal rated deflection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35. Di

PIANC factors (from 3rd party witnessed Type Approval testing)

Angle factor Temperature factor Velocity factor


Angle (°) AF Temperature (°C) TF Time (seconds) VF For steady state deceleration, the
0 1.000 50 0.882 1 1.008 compression time is:
3 0.945
40 0.926 2 1.003 2d
30 0.969 t (seconds) =
3 1.002 Vi
5 0.905 23 1.000
4 1.001 d = fender deflection (mm)
8 0.840 10 1.056
5 1.000 Vi = impact speed (mm/s)
10 0.794 0 1.099
6 1.000
-10 1.143
15 0.669 8 1.000
-20 1.186 If compression time t<4s, please ask.
20 0.529 -30 1.230 ≥10 1.000
Refer to page 1–2 for further information.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–32

CORNER
ARCH
Berth corners are very difficult to
protect. Corner Arch fenders are
available in three standard sizes and
provide a simple, easily installed
solution to prevent damage from
smaller vessels.

Other corner
fender solutions

L F

Donut

L
K

Wheels
J
0.25H

H D B
W

Dimensions

H L W B D F J K M Anchors Weight
CA 150 150 1000 300 240 25 95 110 690 237 8 × M20 80
CA 250 250 750 500 410 40 160 130 420 262 8 × M24 142
Fender Bars
CA 300 300 625 600 490 44 190 140 360 200 8 × M30 208

[ Units: mm, kg ]

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


1–33

ARCH FENDERS

Proven
in practice

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S01-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


Modular Fenders

Section 2

Trelleborg Marine Systems

MV Elements
V Fenders
www.trelleborg.com/marine MI Elements

Ref. M1100-S02-V1.2-EN
2–2

MV
ELEMENTS
MV-elements are the foundation
of many fender systems. These
modular units are compression
moulded from a high performance
polymer which resists attack from
ultraviolet light, ozone and immersion
in seawater for long service life and
low maintenance.
Available in a full range of sizes,
the geometry of the MV-element has
been optimised for maximum energy
absorption per unit volume of rubber
combined with a low reaction force.
Fully encapsulated steel mounting
plates are vulcanised inside the
MV-element to allow easy fixing.
Bolts are located centrally on the
base flanges to reduce stresses,
but being recessed into pockets
the fixings are well protected from
damage.

Features
B Modular design system
B Many standard sizes
B High performance geometry
B Recessed fixings
B Long life, low maintenance

Applications
All vessel types which use the
following systems:
B Fender piles
B V-fenders
B Multiple fenders
B Pivot pillars
B Parallel Motion (Torsion Arm)

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S02-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


2–3

MV ELEMENTS

Each fender generation


provides more energy for
the same reaction force.
Reaction

ENERGY

Deflection

Fender Evolution
Ships have grown larger – so have the demands on fenders. A century ago MV-element
timber (1st Generation) was cheap and worked adequately for the small
vessels of the day. Old tyres (2nd Generation) were abundant and softer but
required expensive maintenance and absorbed little energy.
Cylindricals (3rd Generation) were the first purpose designed fenders,
gaining popularity some 50 years ago, but inefficient use of rubber and low
performance by today’s standards makes them costly. Arch and simple V-fender
buckling fenders (4th Generation) had better performance and integrated the
rubber with steel fixing plates.

5th Generation Fenders


MV-elements are 5th Generation fenders. With refined geometry the rubber
has a characteristic double-buckle ‘S’ shape. This gives the MV-element a
greater deflection for the same reaction so it absorbs more energy than all
previous generations with less material.

System fender
Modular Design
MV-elements are modular so can be installed horizontally or vertically, close
together or further apart, with the ‘V’ facing towards or away from the panel.
‘A’ and ‘B’ compounds can be mixed or different lengths used – allowing
almost limitless permutations and giving the designer greater control on how
an MV-system behaves when impacted.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S02-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


2–4

MV ELEMENTS
Dimensions

L B C D E F G J T Anchor Holes Weight


600 2+2 27
900 150 300 150 300 94 93 47 17 M20 3+3 41
MV300
1200 4+4 54
MV300 elements up to 3000mm available on request.
1500 5+5 68
750 125 125 2+2 50
1000 250 250 2+2 66
1500 250 250 3+3 99
MV400 500 500 125 124 63 17 M24
2000 250 250 4+4 132
2500 250 250 5+5 165
3000 250 250 6+6 198
750 125 125 2+2 84
1000 2+2 111
1500 3+3 167
MV500 500 500 158 142 87 20 M30
2000 250 250 4+4 222
2500 5+5 278
3000 6+6 334
750 125 125 2+2 100
MV550 1000 500 500 172 170 87 20 M30 2+2 132
250 250
1500 3+3 200
750 125 125 2+2 115
MV600 1000 500 500 188 199 87 20 M30 2+2 153
250 250
1500 3+3 230
750 125 125 2+2 180
MV750 1000 500 500 235 230 118 26 M36 2+2 239
250 250
1500 3+3 359
800 150 150 2+2 214
1000 2+2 268
MV800 500 500 250 240 129 26 M36
1500 250 250 3+3 402
2000 4+4 536
800 150 150 2+2 346
850 175 175 2+2 368
900 200 200 2+2 389
950 225 225 2+2 411
1000 250 250 2+2 432
MV1000 1050 275 500 275 500 322 310 162 31 M42 2+2 454
1100 300 300 2+2 476
1150 325 325 2+2 497
1200 350 350 2+2 519
1500 3+3 648
250 250
2000 4+4 864

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S02-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


2–5

MV ELEMENTS
Dimensions

L B C D E F G J T Anchor Holes Weight


800 150 150 2+2 511
850 175 175 2+2 543
900 200 200 2+2 575
950 225 225 2+2 607
1000 250 250 2+2 639
1050 275 275 2+2 671
MV1250 500 500 401 388 202 36 M48
1100 300 300 2+2 703
1150 325 325 2+2 735
1200 350 350 2+2 767
1250 375 375 2+2 799
1500 3+3 959
250 250
2000 4+4 1278
900 200 200 2+2 786
1000 250 250 2+2 873
1100 300 300 2+2 960
MV1450 500 500 454 445 228 41 M48
1200 350 350 2+2 1048
1500 3+3 1310
250 250
2000 4+4 1746
1000 250 250 2+2 1114
1100 300 300 2+2 1226
MV1600 1200 350 500 350 500 507 480 261 50 M56 2+2 1337
1500 3+3 1671
250 250
2000 4+4 2228
[ Units: mm, kg ]

F
G J D E E D

Internal
steel plate H

T
M B C C B
F L

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S02-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


2–6

MV ELEMENTS
Rated Performance Data (RPD)*
F
L
Compound A Compound B R
L
E R E R
600 12.6 91.4 8.8 64
900 18.9 137 13.2 96 d
MV300
1200 25.2 183 17.7 128
1500 31.5 229 22.1 160 H
750 26.9 146 18.8 102
1000 37.4 203 26.2 142
1500 56.1 305 39.3 213
MV400
2000 74.8 406 52.3 284
2500 93.5 508 65.4 356
3000 112 609 78.5 427
750 41.2 179 28.9 125
1000 58.4 254 40.9 178
MV500
1500 87.6 381 61.3 267
2000 117 508 81.8 356 *Rated Performance Data (RPD)
750 49.9 197 34.9 138 Method: Decreasing Velocity (DV)
MV550 1000 70.7 279 49.5 196 Temperature: 23ºC
1500 106 419 74.2 293
Initial speed: 150mm/s
750 59.4 215 41.6 151
MV600 1000 84.1 305 58.9 213 Compression angle: 0º
1500 126 457 88.3 320 Refer to p2–7.
750 90.4 262 63.2 183
MV750 1000 131 381 92 267
1500 197 571 138 400
800 111 302 77.8 212
1000 150 406 105 284
MV800
1500 224 609 157 427
2000 299 813 209 569
800 175 380 122 266
850 189 412 133 288
900 204 444 143 311
950 219 476 153 333
1000 234 508 164 356
MV1000 1050 248 540 174 378
1100 263 572 184 400
1150 278 604 195 423
1200 293 636 205 445
1500 350 762 245 533
2000 467 1016 327 711
800 269 468 188 327
850 293 510 205 357
900 317 551 222 386
950 341 593 239 415
1000 365 635 256 444
1050 389 677 272 474
MV1250
1100 413 718 289 503
1150 437 760 306 532
1200 461 802 323 561
1250 485 844 340 591
1500 548 952 383 667
2000 730 1270 511 889
900 426 638 298 447
1000 491 736 344 516
1100 557 835 390 584
MV1450
1200 622 933 436 653
1500 737 1105 516 773
2000 982 1473 688 1031
1000 598 813 419 569
1100 690 937 483 656
MV1600 1200 781 1061 547 743
1500 897 1219 628 853
2000 1196 1625 837 1138

All performance values are for a single element. [ Units: kNm, kN ]

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S02-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


2–7

MV ELEMENTS

120

100

80
Reaction (%)

60 120

100

40 80

60

Energy (%)
20 40

20

0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
Deflection (%) 57.5

example
Intermediate deflections

Di (%) 0 5 10 15 20 28 35 40 45 50 57.5 62.5


Ri
Ei (%) 0 2 7 14 24 41 56 66 76 85 100 113

Ri (%) 0 31 58 78 92 100 96 90 85 84 100 130 Ei

Nominal rated deflection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35. Di

Decreasing Velocity (DV) test method


The Trelleborg high-speed test press was
developed to simulate real berthing conditions
for MV and MI elements. Depending on element
size, initial speeds exceeding 300mm/s are
achievable.
The test press can accommodate single
elements from MV500 to MV1600 as well as
the MI2000 in lengths up to 1500mm.
Please refer to Trelleborg Marine Systems for
all special test requirements.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S02-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


2–8

MV SYSTEMS
H H
Element spacing Weight support

MV-elements can
r = rated deflection
support a lot of weight.
0.35H r=0.575H The table is a guide
to the permitted
weight of the front
panel in tonnes per
metre of element
0.24H pair before additional
support chains may be
required.
0.78H
WH WV

1.2H Panel weight* (kg)


MV Single or multiple Single or multiple
horizontal vertical
Compound A WH ≤ 1.0 × H × L WV ≤ 1.78 × H × L
0.32H
Compound B WH ≤ 0.7 × H × L WV ≤ 1.25 × H × L

* per pair of elements.

≥50 0.72H
Shear stiffness

Some temporary shear may


DL
be caused by friction as the
MV-elements are compressed.
FL
Maximum shear usually occurs at
approximately 28% deflection.
0.12H
DL ≈ 0.39 × μ × H FT R
DT ≈ 0.82 × μ × H
H
Where,
H = fender height
μ = friction coefficient
DT
MV-elements can be mounted
horizontally or vertically. There
must be enough space around and
between MV-element fenders and
the steel panel to allow them to Tension
deflect without interference.
Distances given in the diagram are If the likely tensile load exceeds the
for guidance. If in doubt, contact your rated reaction then tension chains F
local office. may be required. Please refer to your
local office.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S02-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


2–9

MV SYSTEMS

Proven
in practice

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S02-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


2–10

V-FENDERS
V-fenders fulfil the need for a simple,
and maintenance-free fender system
with high performance and a robust
design at low costs. All V-fenders use
one or several pairs of MV-elements
and a front shield. The shield is a
structural component of the fender,
directly bolted to the MV-element
and easily able to withstand constant
use in busy harbours.
The UHMW-PE face is also very
gentle on ships. It will conform to
the contours of the hull, will not
mark paint (unlike rubber) and does
not spark. UHMW-PE has very low
friction which reduces stresses in
the V-fenders and fixings.

Applications
B General cargo quays
B Berthing dolphins
B Pontoon fendering
B Passenger ferry berths
B Offshore platforms
B Long fender walls

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S02-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


2–11

V-FENDERS
Dimensions Performance (per metre)

Compound A Compound B
H T(min) So MW SW A B C Fixings
E R E R
MV300P* 70 370 270 410 360 454 172 M20 42.0 305 29.5 213
MV400P 80 480 360 500 480 606 232 M24 74.8 406 52.4 284
MV500P 90 590 460 660 600 774 316 M30 117 508 81.8 356
MV550P 90 640 500 750 660 834 320 M30 141 558 99.0 392
MV600P 90 690 530 800 720 894 322 M30 168 610 118 426
MV750P 100 850 680 1010 900 1136 440 M36 262 762 184 534
MV800P 100 900 730 1170 960 1218 480 M36 300 812 210 568
MV1000P 120 1120 900 1330 1200 1524 580 M42 468 1016 328 712
MV1250P 120 1370 1140 1660 1500 1904 724 M48 730 1270 512 888

Please ask for other dimensions [ Units: mm ] [ Units: kNm, kN ]


* MV300 not available in 1000mm length (refer to p2–4).
Performance is for a pair of elements, 1000mm long.

L
L

SW
MW C
C
A
B
A
B

H
H
SO
SO T T

Always specify ‘P’ type elements for V-fenders


(ie. MV500P). These have special internal plates
designed to flex with the UHMW-PE shield. The
flange marked ‘Panel Side’ should be connected
to the shield.

All V-fender performances are based on decreasing


velocity (DV) method compression testing of
full size elements. Performances are valid for
150mm/s initial impact velocity, 23°C ambient
temperature and 0° compression angle.
Site operating conditions or project
specifications may differ from the above. Please
ask your local Trelleborg Marine Systems office for
further details, or visit our web site.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S02-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


2–12

MI-2000
ELEMENTS
MI-2000 fender systems suit very
large vessels and high energy
applications. They share the
modular design concept with MV
elements but with a modified
fixing arrangement to allow greater
deflections and efficiency.
The rubber unit is available
in several standard lengths and
rubber grades which, combined with
the modularity of the MI system,
provides designers with greater
choice and versatility.

Features
B Modular design system
B Choice of lengths and rubber grades
B High performance and efficiency
B Long life, low maintenance

Applications
Ideal for larger vessels including:
B Tankers and LNG ships
B Bulk carriers
B Post-Panamax containers
B Mega cruise ships

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S02-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


2–13

MI-2000 ELEMENTS
MI-2000 Dimensions
B
A B C Anchor Holes Weight
A
1000 1270 1130 M42 6+6 1840 2000
1050 1320 1180 M42 6+6 1941
1100 1370 1230 M42 6+6 2042 1318
1150 1420 1280 M42 6+6 2144
1200 1470 1330 M42 6+6 2245 733 52
1250 1520 1380 M42 6+6 2346
210
1300 1570 1430 M42 6+6 2447 H 210
1350 1620 1480 M42 6+6 2549
C
1400 1670 1530 M42 6+6 2650 585

[ Units: mm, kg ]

MI-2000S Dimensions
B
A B C Anchor Holes Weight* A
1000 1270 1130 M42 6+6 2191 2000
1050 1320 1180 M42 6+6 2286
1100 1370 1230 M42 6+6 2383 1318
1150 1420 1280 M42 6+6 2480 52
1200 1470 1330 M42 6+6 2573 75
733
1250 1520 1380 M42 6+6 2670
210
1300 1570 1430 M42 6+6 2765 210
1350 1620 1480 M42 6+6 2860
585 C
1400 1670 1530 M42 6+6 2957 H
[ Units: mm, kg ]

210
75 thick 620
210

* MI-2000S weight includes fabricated


spacers for both flanges (supplied with
fender elements on request).

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S02-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


2–14

MI-2000
MI-2000 Performance
140
A Compound A Compound B
ER 925 565
1000
120 RR 925 565
ER 971 593
1050
RR 971 593
100
ER 1017 621
1100
RR 1017 621
Reaction (%)

80 ER 1063 650
1150
140 RR 1063 650
60 120 ER 1110 678
1200
RR 1110 678
100
ER 1156 706
40 80 1250
RR 1156 706

Energy (%)
60 ER 1202 734
1300
20 40 RR 1202 734
20 ER 1248 763
1350
RR 1248 763
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 ER 1295 791
1400
Deflection (%) 62 RR 1295 791
All values are for [ Units: kN, kNm ]
a single element.

example
Intermediate deflections

Di (%) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 62 65
Ri
Ei (%) 0 2 6 14 23 32 42 52 61 71 79 88 96 100 103

Ri (%) 0 34 63 84 95 99 100 98 95 91 86 82 90 100 127 Ei

Nominal rated deflection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35. Di

All MI-2000 performance values are based on


decreasing velocity (DV) method compression
testing of full size elements on a dedicated high
speed test press. Performances are valid for
150mm/s initial impact velocity, 23°C ambient
temperature and 0° compression angle.
Site operating conditions or project
specifications may differ from the above. Please
ask your local Trelleborg Marine Systems office
for further details, or visit our web site.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S02-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


2–15

MI-2000S
MI-2000S Performance
140
A Compound A Compound B
ER 989 604
1000
120 RR 925 565
ER 1039 635
1050
RR 971 593
100
ER 1088 665
1100
RR 1017 621
Reaction (%)

80 ER 1138 695
1150
140 RR 1063 650
60 120 ER 1187 725
1200
RR 1110 678
100
ER 1237 756
40 80 1250
RR 1156 706

Energy (%)
60 ER 1286 786
1300
20 40 RR 1202 734
20 ER 1336 816
1350
RR 1248 763
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 ER 1385 846
1400
Deflection (%) 66 RR 1295 791

All values are for [ Units: kN, kNm ]


a single element.

example
Intermediate deflections

Di (%) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 66 67.5
Ri
Ei (%) 0 2 6 13 21 30 40 49 58 67 75 82 90 100 103

Ri (%) 0 35 63 83 95 99 100 98 94 90 85 81 81 100 110 Ei

Nominal rated deflection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35. Di

All MI-2000S performance values are based on


decreasing velocity (DV) method compression
testing of full size elements on a dedicated high
speed test press. Performances are valid for
150mm/s initial impact velocity, 23°C ambient
temperature and 0° compression angle.
Site operating conditions or project
specifications may differ from the above. Please
ask your local Trelleborg Marine Systems office
for further details, or visit our web site.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S02-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


Multi-purpose
Fenders
Section 3

Trelleborg Marine Systems


Cylindricals
Extrusions
Composites
Fender Bars
www.trelleborg.com/marine MPP
Ramp & Cope
Ref. M1100-S03-V1.2-EN Shear
3–2

CYLINDRICAL
FENDERS
Cylindrical Fenders have protected
ships for more years than any other
fender type. Cylindrical fenders are
simple and versatile as well as being
easy to install. Their progressive
reaction makes them ideal for berths
serving large and small vessels. The
wide range of available sizes (as well
as almost any intermediate size)
means Cylindrical Fenders can be
closely matched to each application.

Features
B Simple and economical design
B Easy to install and maintain
B All sizes up to 2700mm diameter
B Thick wall resists abrasion and wear
B Progressive load-deflection curve

Applications
B Bulk cargo berths
B General cargo quays
B RoRo and ferry terminals
B Fishing and workboat berths
B Pontoons and floating structures
B Tug havens

L OD

ID

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S03-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


3–3

CYLINDRICAL FENDERS
OD × ID OD / ID E R P* Weight Typical fixing
(mm) (kNm) (kN) (kN/m2) (kg/m) arrangements
100 × 50 2.00 0.8 43 547 7.2
125 × 65 1.92 1.3 51 500 11.0
150 × 75 2.00 1.8 65 552 16.3
175 × 75 2.33 2.7 92 781 24.1
200 × 100 2.00 3.3 86 547 29.0
250 × 125 2.00 5.1 108 550 45.3
300 × 150 2.00 7.4 129 547 65.2
380 × 190 2.00 11.8 164 550 105
400 × 200 2.00 13.1 172 547 116
450 × 225 2.00 16.6 194 549 147
500 × 250 2.00 28 275 700 181
600 × 300 2.00 40 330 700 255
800 × 400 2.00 72 440 700 453
1000 × 500 2.00 112 550 700 707
1200 × 600 2.00 162 660 700 1018
1400 × 700 2.00 220 770 700 1386
1400 × 800 1.75 208 649 516 1245
1500 × 750 2.00 253 825 700 1591
1600 × 800 2.00 288 880 700 1810
1750 × 900 1.94 340 929 657 2124
2000 × 1200 1.67 415 871 462 2414
2400 × 1200 2.00 647 1321 701 4073
2700 × 1300 2.08 818 1486 728 5154
*excludes effect of fixing accessories.
Deflection, (D) = ID. Performance per metre length.

140

Nominal rated deflection may


120 vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.

100
Reaction (%)

80
140
60 120
100
Energy (%)

40 80
60
20 40
20
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
Deflection (% of ID)

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S03-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


3–4

CYLINDRICAL FENDERS
Small cylindricals

OD ID Chain Shackle
100 50 14 16
125 65 14 16
150 75 16 16
175 75 16 16
0.1L (min)
200 90 18 19
OD
200 100 18 19
1.5D 250 125 20 22
300 150 24 28
L < 6000mm 380 190 28 35
400 200 28 35
Small cylindricals (≤Ø600mm) are often suspended from chains connected to 450 225 28 35
500 250 32 38
brackets or U-anchors on the quay wall.
600 300 35 44

[ Units: mm ]

Large cylindricals

OD ID L ØB Chain Shackle
1000 35 24 28
1500 45 28 35
800 400 2000 55 32 38
2500 65 34 44
3000 70 40 50
OD ID 1000 45 28 35
øB
1500 55 32 38
1000 500 2000 65 38 44
2500 75 40 50
L
3000 85 44 50
Large cylindricals (Ø900–Ø1600mm) often use a central support bar 1000 50 28 35
1500 65 34 44
connected at each end to chains which go back to brackets or U-anchors
1200 600 2000 75 40 50
on the quay wall.
2500 85 44 50
3000 100 50 56
1000 65 38 44
1500 70 38 44
1400 800 2000 80 44 50
2500 90 48 56
3000 100 52 64
1000 75 40 50
1500 80 40 50
1600 800 2000 90 46 50
2500 110 48 56
3000 120 54 64

[ Units: mm ]
Very large cylindricals (≥Ø1600mm) may require special ladder brackets due
to their weight. These are specially designed for each application.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S03-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


3–5

CYLINDRICAL FENDERS

Proven
in practice

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S03-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


3–6

EXTRUDED
FENDERS
Extruded fenders are simple rubber
profiles, usually attached with bolts
to the structure. Extrusions can be
made in virtually any length then cut
and drilled to suit each application.
Pre-curved sections and special
sizes are available on request.
Usually black in colour, extruded
fenders can also be supplied in DC-fenders
creamy white as an option.
Flat Bolt
A B øC øD E F G H Weight
bar size
Applications
100 100 30 15 25 10 90–130 200–300 50 × 6 M12 10.1
B Jetties and wharves for small craft
150 150 65 20 30 12 110–150 250–350 60 × 8 M16 20.6
B Tugs and workboats
200 200 75 25 45 15 130–180 300–400 80 × 10 M20 38.5
B Pontoon protection
250 250 100 30 50 20 140–200 350–450 100 × 10 M24 59.0
B Inland waterways
300 300 125 30 60 25 140–200 350–450 110 × 12 M24 83.7
B General purpose fendering
350 350 150 35 70 25 140–200 350–450 120 × 12 M30 113
400 400 175 35 80 30 140–200 350–450 130 × 15 M30 146
400 400 200 35 80 30 140–200 350–450 130 × 15 M30 137
500 500 250 35 100 30 140–200 350–450 130 × 15 M36 214
Fender E R E R [ Units: mm, kg/m ]
size (kNm) (kN) (kNm) (kN)
SC-fenders
100 1.9 157 2.7 173
150 4.2 235 6.4 259 Flat Bolt
A B øC øD E F G H Weight
bar size
200 7.5 314 11.3 345 100 100 30 15 25 10 90–130 200–300 50 × 6 M12 11.4
250 11.7 392 17.7 431 150 150 65 20 30 12 110–150 250–350 60 × 8 M16 23.6
165 125 65 20 30 15 110–150 250–350 60 × 8 M16 21.3
300 16.9 471 25.5 518
200 200 75 25 45 15 130–180 300–400 80 × 10 M20 43.8
350 22.9 549 34.3 604 200 200 100 25 40 15 130–180 300–400 80 × 10 M20 39.5
400 29.4 628 45.1 690 250 200 80 30 45 20 140–200 350–450 90 × 10 M24 55.3
250 250 100 30 50 20 140–200 350–450 100 × 10 M24 67.2
500 46.0 785 70.5 863
300 250 100 30 50 25 140–200 350–450 100 × 10 M24 82.6
Values are per metre. 300 300 125 30 60 25 140–200 350–450 110 × 12 M24 95.6
350 350 150 35 65 25 140–200 350–450 120 × 12 M30 126
350 350 175 35 65 25 140–200 350–450 120 × 12 M30 121
120 400 400 200 35 70 30 140–200 350–450 130 × 15 M30 158
500 500 250 45 90 40 150–230 400–500 150 × 20 M36 247
Rated Reaction
100
Reaction (% of Rated)

[ Units: mm, kg/m ]


Energy (% of Rated)

80
B G H H
60 120 E F
tion
ac 100
40 Re 80
øD
y 60
20 rg
E ne 40
20 øC A
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50

Deflection (%)

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S03-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


3–7

EXTRUDED FENDERS

DD-series

A B C D øE øF G H Flat bar Bolt size Weight


80 70 45 30 30 15 90–130 200–300 35 × 5 M12 4.8
100 100 50 45 30 15 90–130 200–300 40 × 5 M12 8.5
125 125 60 60 40 20 110–150 250–300 50 × 6 M16 13.2
150 150 75 75 40 20 110–150 250–300 60 × 8 M16 18.5
200 150 100 80 50 25 130–180 300–400 80 × 10 M20 23.1
200 200 100 100 50 25 130–180 300–400 80 × 10 M20 32.9
250 200 125 100 60 30 140–200 350–450 90 × 12 M24 39.9
250 250 125 125 60 30 140–200 350–450 90 × 12 M24 51.5
300 300 150 150 60 30 140–200 350–450 110 × 12 M24 74.1
350 350 175 175 75 35 140–200 350–450 130 × 15 M30 101
380 380 190 190 75 35 140–200 350–450 140 × 15 M30 119
400 300 175 150 75 35 140–200 350–450 130 × 15 M30 99
Fender E R E R 400 400 200 200 75 35 140–200 350–450 150 × 15 M30 132
size (kNm) (kN) (kNm) (kN) 500 500 250 250 90 45 160–230 400–500 180 × 20 M36 206
100 1.4 77 2.7 136 [ Units: mm, kg/m ]
150 3.2 115 6.4 206 SD-series
200 5.7 153 11.3 275
A B C D øE øF G H Flat bar Bolt size Weight
250 8.9 191 17.6 343 100 100 50 45 30 15 90–130 200–300 40 × 5 M12 9.9
300 12.9 230 25.5 412 150 150 70 65 40 20 110–150 250–300 50 × 8 M16 22.7
350 17.6 268 34.3 471 165 125 80 60 40 20 110–150 250–300 60 × 8 M16 20.3
200 150 90 65 50 25 130–180 300–400 70 × 10 M20 30.8
400 23.0 306 45.2 589
200 200 90 95 50 25 130–180 300–400 70 × 10 M20 39.8
500 35.9 383 70.7 736 250 200 120 95 60 30 140–200 350–450 90 × 12 M24 49.4
Values are per metre. 250 250 120 120 60 30 140–200 350–450 90 × 12 M24 61.1
300 250 140 115 60 30 140–200 350–450 100 × 12 M24 75.0
300 300 125 135 60 30 140–200 350–450 100 × 12 M24 92.0
400 400 200 200 75 35 140–200 350–450 150 × 15 M30 153
120
500 500 250 250 90 45 160–230 400–500 180 × 20 M36 239
Rated Reaction
100
Reaction (% of Rated)

[ Units: mm, kg/m ]


Energy (% of Rated)

80
B G H H
60 n 120
tio 100
D 25
ac
40 Re 80
y 60
20 erg 40
En
20 F øE C A
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50

Deflection (%)

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S03-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


3–8

COMPOSITE
FENDERS
Composite fenders* are composites
of rubber for resilience and UHMW-
PE for low-friction and wear resistant
properties. The two materials are
bonded with a special vulcanising
method which is stronger and more
reliable than a mechanical joint.
Composite fenders are used
where the simplicity of extrusions are
required but with lower shear forces.

Features
B Resilient rubber body
B Low-friction UHMW-PE face
B Strong molecular bond
B Easily drilled and cut
B Many standard sizes
Shear deformations

Applications μ = 0.8–1.0 μ = 0.15–0.2


B Jetties and wharves for small craft
B Mooring pontoons
B Pile guides on floating structures
B Inland waterways

* Also called Rubbylene®


Rubber Composite

E R E R

100 × 100 4.0 222 80 × 80 1.6 76

200 × 200 11.5 334 100 × 100 2.2 154

250 × 250 24.3 565 120 × 120 3.0 188


300 × 300 42.0 624 150 × 150 6.0 377

Values are per metre. [ Units: kNm, kN ] Values are per metre. [ Units: kNm, kN ]
Performance values are at bore closure. Performance values are at bore closure.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S03-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


3–9

COMPOSITE FENDERS

CF-A series CF-B series

Flat Bolt Std Weight


A B øC* t øD E F G H bar size Length CF-A CF-B
100 100 30 20 15 25 10 90–130 200–300 50 × 6 M12 3000 10.3 11.1
150 150 65 20 20 30 12 110–150 250–350 60 × 8 M16 3000 21.5 27.0
165 125 65 20 20 35 15 110–150 250–350 60 × 8 M16 3000 19.2 24.8
200 200 75 25 25 45 20 130–180 300–400 80 × 10 M20 3000 40.2 48.0
200 200 100 25 25 45 20 130–180 300–400 80 × 10 M20 3000 36.2 48.0
250 250 100 30 30 50 25 140–200 350–450 100 × 10 M24 2000 60.2 75.0
300 300 125 30 30 60 30 140–200 350–450 110 × 12 M24 3700 92.1 108
* Dimension only applies to CF-A fender. [ Units: mm, kg/m ]

B G H H
E t
F

øD

øC A

CF-C series CF-D series

Flat Bolt Std Weight


A B øC* a b c t øD E F G H bar size Length CF-C CF-D
80 80 42 60 40 44 10 15 25 6 90–130 200–300 45 × 6 M12 2000 5.4 7.0
100 100 45 74 50 56 10 15 25 8 90–130 200–300 45 × 6 M12 2000 8.4 11.0
120 120 62 88 60 67 12 20 30 10 110–150 250–350 60 × 8 M16 2000 12.2 15.8
150 150 73 110 75 83 15 20 30 12 110–150 250–350 60 × 8 M16 3000 19.7 24.8
* Dimension only applies to CF-C fender. [ Units: mm, kg/m ]

B G H H
E t F

øD

øC a A

b
c
Composite fenders are supplied undrilled. Drilled and counterbored holes,
special cuts, etc are available on special request.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S03-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


3–10

FENDER
BARS
Fender Bars are available in three
different versions:

B ML-type for exposed locations


B MLS-type for low reaction
B Delta PU for visibility and
non-marking

All Fender Bars can resist high


impacts and are suitable for a
wide range of general purpose
applications.

ML Fender Bars
The ML Fender Bar is intended for
heavy duty applications – everything
from ferry berths to bumpers on
barges. The vulcanised internal
steel plate provides very strong
fixing points and reduces bending
moments in the bolts.

MLS Fender Bars


MLS Fender Bars have a special
modified profile to reduce reaction
forces and allow a high degree of
flexibility in all directions. Being
softer, MLS Fender Bars are ideal
for protecting smaller workboats,
pontoons and load-sensitive
structures.

Delta PU Bars
The Delta PU Bar meets the
challenges of berthing light craft with
aluminium or GRP hulls by combining
high performance and low friction
properties in a competitively priced
unit. Available in highly visible, non-
marking colours, the Delta PU Bar
can also improve safety or identify
berths and danger areas.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S03-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


3–11

FENDER BARS
Dimensions Performance

Type W H L A B Anchors Weight E R


ML 150 150 1000 250 500 2 × M24 38 16.7 638
ML 150 150 1500 250 500 3 × M24 56 24.5 961
ML 150 200 1000 250 500 2 × M24 43 16.7 441
ML 150 200 1500 250 500 3 × M24 65 24.5 667
ML 200 200 1000 250 500 2 × M30 65 26.5 824
ML 200 200 1500 250 500 3 × M30 98 40.2 1236
ML 200 250 1000 250 500 2 × M30 77 26.5 657
ML 200 250 1500 250 500 3 × M30 116 40.2 991
ML 200 300 1000 250 500 2 × M30 88 26.5 530
ML 200 300 1500 250 500 3 × M30 132 40.2 795
MLS 200 300 1000 250 500 2 × M30 63 23.0 355
MLS 200 300 1500 250 500 3 × M30 95 38.0 593
DPU 140/80 100 1000 50 450 3 × M12 9.5 – –
Please ask for other dimensions [ Units: mm, kg ] [ Units: kNm, kN ]

L
H A B B A

W ML/MLS Strong Fixings


Fender Bars have
a low-profile fixing
20
which prevents
L
A B B A bending of the
H
bolt even under
large deflections
W C DPU and shear. With
timber fenders
the bolts easily
40
bend and the
wood cracks and
125 splinters.

100
Reaction Energy
ML
Reaction (%)

75 150
MLS
45
Energy (%)

50 100

25 50
150

0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50
Deflection (%)

Nominal rated deflection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S03-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


3–12

MARINE
PROTECTION
PLATE (MPP)
Marine Protection Plates (MPP) are
resilient bumpers designed for quays
where small vessels are moored,
protecting both the quay face and
vessel from abrasion. MPP fenders
have also been used at the push
knee on some tugs.
MPP are ideal for applications
T
where the distance between the boat
and dock must be minimised. The
12
design includes a heavy-duty steel
back plate which is vulcanised into D E
W
the rubber body so only a few fixing
bolts are required. C E L
MPP are available with a flat or C Ø25 Ø54
wave-patterned surface design.

Type T W L C D E Anchors Weight


500 100 800 45
300
MPP 50 600 1000 4 × M20 54
150 700
750 450 67
500 100 650 67
300
MPP 50 600 1500 150 6 × M20 80
600
750 100 450 100
500 100 800 59
300
MPP 75 600 1000 4 × M20 71
150 700
750 450 88
500 100 650 88
300
MPP 75 600 1500 150 6 × M20 106
600
750 100 450 132
500 100 800 73
300
MPP 100 600 1000 4 × M20 88
150 700
750 450 109
500 100 650 109
300
MPP 100 600 1500 150 6 × M20 131
600
750 100 450 164
500 100 800 87
300
MPP 125 600 1000 4 × M20 104
150 700
750 450 130
500 100 650 130
300
MPP 125 600 1500 150 6 × M20 156
600
750 100 450 195
500 100 800 100
300
MPP 150 600 1000 4 × M20 121
150 700
750 450 151
500 100 650 151
300
MPP 150 600 1500 150 6 × M20 181
600
750 100 450 227

Tailor-made corner elements and other dimensions available on request. [ Units: mm, kg ]

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S03-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


3–13

RAMP
AND COPE
PROTECTORS
Ramp and Cope Protectors are
special wedge-shaped rubber
elements which are fitted together to
form a flexible extension to steel and
concrete structures. Their internal
steel plate gives a strong connection
and the grooved rubber face provides
a high friction surface that prevents
slipping.

Ramp Protectors
Used as Ramp Protectors, they 900
allow easy loading and unloading of 20 1000
vehicles and trailers whilst protecting
the front edge of the ramp from 162
312
wear. Noise levels are also much RCP-1000 shown.
lower compared to steel ramps. Other dimensions are
Ramp Protectors weigh much less available on request.
than steel too – so they are easier to
install and place less stress on the 500
structure.
200
260

Cope Protectors
Used as Cope Protectors, the
elements form a flexible extension
Reduced gap to
to the cope or top edge of the quay.
berthing line
This reduces the gap between quay
Vehicle
face and ship where loose or bulk 1000
cargoes can fall into the harbour.
Cope Protectors are also flexible, so
will bend out of the way if hit by a
ship during berthing.

Due to their flexibility,


Cope Protectors are not
designed to support the weight
of people, vehicles, etc.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S03-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


3–14

SHEAR
FENDERS
Shear Fenders are unique because
they have a linear load-deflection
characteristic in shear but remain
stiff in compression to support heavy
loads. Their simple concept makes
Shear Fenders easy to install and
ideal for low energy applications. The
top and bottom steel plates are fully
encased in rubber which protects
them from corrosion and minimises
maintenance.
Piles and simple frontal panels
are often used in conjunction with
Shear Fenders. Movement in shear
should be limited by chains or
other mechanical stops to prevent
overload.

Features
B Linear reaction curve
B Omnidirectional
B Supports large weights

Applications
B General cargo berths
B Ferry terminals
B Offshore boat landings
B Bridge protection
B Pontoon yokes

Type-SF Type-E46

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S03-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


3–15

SHEAR FENDERS
Type-SF Shear Fender

Fender A B E F G H J T ØS Bolt Weight

SF 400-180 525 525 – 405 405 180 136 22 400 M24 115

SF 500-260 700 550 80 430 440 260 190 35 500 M30 190

SF 500-275 610 610 – 510 510 275 231 22 500 M24 183

[ Units: mm, kg ]

Shear Compression
E F E F H
Fender
DS ES RS DC EC RC

SF 400-180 136 10.0 147 20 1.2 118 B ØS G B ØS G

SF 500-260 190 23.8 250 29 3.8 265

SF 500-275 231 24.9 216 35 4.5 255 A A


T J T
[ Units: mm, kNm, kN ]

Type-E46 Shear Fender

Fender W H L A B C ØD E Bolt Weight


E46498 305 352 489 21 127 430 127 310 22 77
E46502 406 471 641 24 178 575 178 423 25 136

[ Units: mm, kg ]

B W
Shear Compression øD
Fender
DS ES RS DC EC RC
E46498 484 14.0 57.9 155 2.5 61.8
E46502 660 32.7 99.1 212 6.2 116 C L

[ Units: mm, kNm, kN ]

E A
120
Nominal rated deflection may
100 vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.

80
Reaction (%)

60 120
100
Energy (%)

40 80

20 40

0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100
Shear Deflection (%)

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S03-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


Pneumatic and
Rolling Fenders
Section 4

Trelleborg Marine Systems

Pneumatic
Hydropneumatic
Wheel Fenders
www.trelleborg.com/marine Roller Fenders
Cushion Rollers
Ref. M1100-S04-V1.2-EN
4–2

PNEUMATIC
FENDERS
Pneumatic fenders are ideal for
permanent and semi-permanent
port applications and for offshore
ship-to-ship transfers. They are
supplied in a wide range of sizes
and in standard or high-pressure
versions. Smaller fenders can be
supplied as Hook type. Larger
fenders are commonly fitted with
a chain-tyre net (CTN) for added
protection. For navy ships, a grey
body is also available.

Features
B Easy and fast to deploy
B Very low reaction and hull pressure
B Suitable for small and large tidal
ranges
B Maintains large clearances between
hull and structure

Applications
B Oil and gas tankers
B Fast ferries and aluminium vessels
B Temporary and permanent 1
installations
B Rapid response and emergencies

1 Abrasion-resistant rubber skin 3 Airtight rubber layer

2 Multi-layer reinforcement 4 Inflation valve

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S04-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


4–3

PNEUMATIC FENDERS
Fender body Chain net Total Chain
Size (kg) (kg) (kg) (mm)
300 × 500 10 – 10 10
Hook type
300 × 600 15 – 15 10
L
500 × 800 25 – 25 13
500 × 1000 35 – 35 13
800 × 1200 75 100 175 16
800 × 1500 95 110 205 16
1000 × 1500 140 170 310 16
1000 × 2000 170 200 370 16
1200 × 1800 180 210 390 18
1200 × 2000 200 220 420 18
1350 × 2500 270 260 530 20
1500 × 2500 300 400 700 22
1500 × 3000 350 440 790 22
2000 × 3000 550 880 1430 26
Chain-tyre net (CTN) type
2000 × 3500 650 920 1570 28 L
2000 × 6000 950 1120 2170 32
2500 × 4000 P 1100 1510 2610 32
2500 × 5500 P 1350 1620 2970 36
3000 × 5000 P 1700 2620 4320 38
3300 × 4500 P 1800 2360 4160 38
3300 × 6500 P 2250 3120 5370 44
3300 × 10500 P 2800 4050 6850 48
4500 × 7000 P 3250 5100 8350 50
4500 × 9000 P 4950 6200 11150 50

P = Pressure Relief Valve fitted as standard.

Installation dimensions

Pneumatic fenders must be installed onto a solid structure or reaction panel to ensure a
c b HHWL
that they are properly supported during impacts.
d
Size a b c d e w tidal range
1000 × 1500 975 950 1350 200 375 2000 LLWL
1200 × 2000 1200 1140 1620 220 430 2600 e
1500 × 2500 1525 1420 2050 250 525 3250
2000 × 3500 2050 1900 2700 300 650 4500
2500 × 4000 2490 2380 3380 450 890 5200
3300 × 6500 3380 3140 4460 500 1080 8500
w
[ Units: mm ]

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S04-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


4–4

PNEUMATIC FENDERS
Initial Pressure Z 0.5kgf/cm2 (7.1psi) 0.8kgf/cm2 (11.4psi)
Energy Reaction Pressure Energy Reaction Pressure
Size (kNm) (kN) (kN/m2) (kNm) (kN) (kN/m2)
300 × 500 1.3 22.6 189 1.7 29.4 246
300 × 600 1.5 26.5 180 2.0 35.3 239
500 × 800 5.7 58.9 187 7.4 78.5 249
500 × 1000 7.2 73.6 179 9.1 98.1 239
800 × 1200 21.6 141 188 28.1 187 250
800 × 1500 27.5 186 191 35.1 235 241
1000 × 1500 40.2 222 190 52.7 281 240
1000 × 2000 54.0 295 180 70.2 374 228
1200 × 1800 69.7 320 190 91.0 404 240
1200 × 2000 77.5 354 185 101 449 235
1350 × 2500 125 496 181 175 650 238
1500 × 2500 152 554 186 196 697 234
1500 × 3000 182 658 178 235 837 227
2000 × 3000 324 883 189 422 1122 240
2000 × 3500 378 1030 183 491 1315 234
2000 × 6000 647 1766 171 843 2246 217
2500 × 4000 675 1481 188 872 1864 236
2500 × 5500 928 2037 178 1197 2560 224
3000 × 5000 1226 2207 185 1570 2786 233
3300 × 4500 1324 2197 194 1712 2764 244
3300 × 6500 1913 3169 181 2472 3993 228
3300 × 10600 3090 5121 171 4297 6612 220
4500 × 7000 3816 4660 186 4944 5866 234
4500 × 9000 4954 6004 152 6357 7544 191

140

120 Nominal rated deflection may


vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.

100
Reaction (%)

80
140
60 120
100
40 80
Energy (%)

60
20 40
20
0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
Deflection (%)

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S04-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


4–5

HYDRO-
PNEUMATIC
FENDERS
Submarines and other vessels which contact fenders
below waterline require a unique solution. Hydro-
pneumatic fenders are specially adapted to this
application. The fender body is partially water-filled,
then pressurised with air and ballasted to make it stand
vertically. Fender draft and performance can be tuned by
altering the water:air ratio and inflation pressure.

Features
D
B Sub-surface contact face
B Very low hull pressures
B Variable draft
B Prevents acoustic tile damage
Sea Level

Applications Air
B Submarines Length
Water
B Some fast ferries
B Semi-submersible oil rigs

Due to the very specialist nature of Hydro-pneumatic


fenders, it is strongly advised that a detailed study be
W
carried out for each case.
Please ask for assistance with this. Ballast Weight

Initial Pressure
Fender 0.5bar (7.1psi)
Diameter Length Water D Energy Reaction
(mm) (mm) (%) (%) (kNm) (kN)
65 45 134 611
1700 7200
0 60 592 1813
65 45 155 599
2000 6000
0 60 647 1766
65 45 223 687
2500 5500
0 60 928 2037
60 45 616 1247
3300 6500
0 60 1913 3169
55 45 589 1275
3300 10500
0 60 3120 5170

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S04-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


4–6

WHEEL
FENDERS
Wheel fenders are widely used
on exposed corners to help ships
manoeuvre into berths and narrow
channels such as locks and dry-dock
entrances. The main axle slides
on bearings and the wheel reacts
against back rollers to provide
high energy and minimal rolling
resistance, whilst the stainless
steel and composite Trelleborg
Orkot® bearings are almost zero
maintenance.

Features
B Highest energy absorption
B Very low rolling resistance protective eyebrow
B Use singly or in multiple stacks B
K L
B Composite and stainless steel
bearings deflection
B Low maintenance casing design
E

Applications flared hull


B Dry-dock entrances and walls
B Lock approaches
K B
B Exposed corners L
flared hull

E
small ship

K B L
ship at
high water

HHWL E

E
ship at
low water
LLWL E

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S04-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


4–7

WHEEL FENDERS
The table indicates typical wheel fender casing dimensions. For special applications and unusual corners, the casing
shape can be altered for a perfect fit. Please ask Trelleborg Marine Systems for details.

Fender A B C D E F H J K L α
110-45WF 1700 1000 1450 1080 900 350 460 650 50 150 0–40°
130-50WF 2000 1200 1750 1300 1000 350 510 850 50 200 0–40°
175-70WF 2650 1500 2200 1750 1150 550 690 950 50 200 0–40°
200-75WF 2750 1750 2550 1980 1250 500 760 1250 50 250 0–45°
250-100WF 3350 2200 3200 2550 1600 850 970 1350 50 250 0–45°
290-110WF 4200 2500 3750 2900 1700 1000 900 1500 50 250 0–45°
[ Units: mm ]

A Ship Direction

n
tio
ec
Dir
F =

ip
Sh
=
B
α
J =
C
=

On the 90° corner of a jetty On an angled knuckle


for warping corner for alignment
Deflection d
Ship Direction

øD
Ship Direction

0–30

H E

Gate
Gate

At the 90° entrance of a Within the body of a lock or


lock or dry dock dry dock

120
Fender Energy Reaction Deflection Pressure
100 (kNm) (kN) (mm) (bar)
110-45WF 33 150 400 5.5
Reaction (%)

80
130-50WF 61 220 500 3.5
60 120
175-70WF 100 315 600 4.8
100
Energy (%)

40 80 200-75WF 220 590 700 5.5


60
20 40 250-100WF 440 920 925 5.5
20 290-110WF 880 1300 1200 5.8
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100
Deflection (% of d) Nominal rated deflection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S04-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


4–8

ROLLER
FENDERS
Roller Fenders are usually installed
to guide ships in restricted spaces
like walls of dry docks. They can
also be used on corners and lock
entrances where lower energies are
needed. Roller Fenders use stainless
steel and composite Trelleborg
Orkot® bearings which give a very low
rolling resistance and require virtually
zero maintenance.

Features
B Good energy absorption
B Gentle contact face
B Low rolling resistance
B Use singly or in multiple stacks
B Composite and stainless steel
bearings
B Low maintenance frame design

Applications
B Dry-dock entrances and walls
B Lock approaches
B Some exposed corners and
entrances

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S04-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


4–9

ROLLER FENDERS
The table indicates typical roller fender frame dimensions. For special applications and unusual corners, the frame
shape can be altered for a perfect fit. Please ask Trelleborg Marine Systems for details.

Fender A B C D E G H J K L Anchor
110-45RF 1250 1150 610 1080 1150 220 460 800 340 60 6 × M30
130-50RF 1530 1400 740 1320 1450 260 510 950 400 75 6 × M30
140-60RF 1600 1450 765 1370 1500 270 610 1000 425 75 6 × M30
175-70RF 2050 1850 975 1750 1900 350 690 1250 500 125 6 × M36
200-75RF 2300 2100 1110 1980 2100 400 765 1400 550 150 6 × M42
250-100RF 3000 2700 1425 2550 2700 500 895 1800 700 200 6 × M48
[ Units: mm ]

A Ship Direction

n
tio
E

ec
Dir
ip
Sh
=

=
C

= =
B

On the 90° corner of a jetty On an angled knuckle


G for warping corner for alignment
Deflection
d
Ship Direction

øD
L
Ship Direction

0–30

K
H J
K Gate
Gate

L At the 90° entrance of a Within the body of a lock or


lock or dry dock dry dock

120
Fender Energy Reaction Deflection Pressure
100 (kNm) (kN) (mm) (bar)
110-45RF 13 175 152 5.5
Reaction (%)

80
130-50RF 22 200 230 3.5
60 120
140-60RF 20 210 205 3.5
100
Energy (%)

40 80 175-70RF 37 345 225 4.8


60
20 40 200-75RF 100 765 270 5.5
20 250-100RF 170 1000 345 5.5
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100
Deflection (% of d) Nominal rated deflection may vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S04-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


4–10

CUSHION
ROLLERS
Cushion Rollers are used to guide
pontoons and floating structures
quietly and gently up and down
their guide piles. The resilient
wheel can be supplemented by a
rubber cushion pad to withstand
berthing impacts. Stainless steel
and plastic bearings require minimal
maintenance.

Features
B Extremely quiet
B Resilient wheel and cushion
B Withstands berthing impacts Guide pile
B Gentle on protective coatings
B Low maintenance bearings

Applications
B Pontoon guides
B Other floating structures

Pontoon

Roller

Cushion

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S04-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


4–11

CUSHION ROLLERS
The table indicates typical Cushion Roller dimensions. For special applications, the shape can be altered for a perfect fit.
Please ask Trelleborg Marine Systems for details.

Fender Capacity A B C D T W a1 a2 a3 b1 b2 Fixings


CR10 10t 450 450 542 370 130 125 90 310 – 35 380 4 × M20
CR15 15t 450 450 542 370 130 190 90 175 135 35 380 6 × M20
CR20 20t 450 520 546 370 130 250 90 175 135 70 380 6 × M24

[ Units: mm ]

6 2

1 Rubber roller

5 2 Rubber cushion pad

3 Roller frame
3
4 Axle and bearings
4

5 Roller fixings
1
6 Cushion fixings

B C
b1 b2 b1 D T

a1

a3
a2
A
a2
a3

a1

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S04-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


Foam Fenders
and Buoys
Section 5

Trelleborg Marine Systems

SeaGuard
SeaCushion
Donut
www.trelleborg.com/marine SeaFloat
Ref. M1100-S05-V1.2-EN
5–2

FOAM FENDER AND

Trelleborg Foam Fenders, Donuts and Buoys


all share the same construction technology
centred on a closed-cell polyethylene
foam core and an outer skin of reinforced
polyurethane elastomer. The foam absorbs
the impacts whilst the skin resists wear and
tear in an aggressive environment.

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–3

BUOY TECHNOLOGY

High energy, low reaction Strong reinforcement Safety first


Core foam comes in many different Skin and reinforcement are No matter how badly abused,
types. Lower density foams are applied simultaneously – a Trelleborg Foam Fenders, Donuts
softer and generate lower reaction method pioneered by and unique and Buoys will not burst or explode.
forces. Higher density foams are to Trelleborg. Nylon filaments are Damage is rare, but if the worst
stiffer and can absorb more impact individually applied at the optimum should happen there is the comfort
energy. The micro-cell structure of angle. Multiple homogeneous layers that Trelleborg fenders and buoys
the foam contains millions of tiny air increase strength, and additional will still function until repairs are
bubbles. These reach an equilibrium reinforcement is applied to both possible.
after a few compression cycles – one ends where stresses are highest.
reason why the performance of all This system gives a final strength
foam fenders should be rated after impossible to match with fabric
at least three full deflections. layering methods.

Unsinkable Wear resistant


The closed cell foam structure The polyurethane elastomer is spray
makes punctures a thing of the past. applied. This creates a high quality
Every cell is separate and so water and homogeneous skin matrix
cannot migrate into the foam. Even combining extreme wear resistance
after many years active service, the with non-marking properties and the
foam core can be returned to the option of high visibility colours.
factory, re-skinned and made ready
for a new lease of life.

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–4

SEA
GUARD®
SeaGuard fenders can be deployed
floated or suspended, against a quay wall
or for ship-to-ship operations. SeaGuard
fenders suit all sites with small or large
tidal changes. They also work just as well
on new or old structures.
Hull pressures are very low, making
SeaGuard fenders gentle on soft-skinned
ships. The skin is very tough but also
non-marking, even against white-hulled
yachts and cruise liners.
Low maintenance comes as standard
because the polyurethane elastomer is
highly resistant to the effects of ozone
and ultra violet light. SeaGuard fenders
will never sink or deflate. Even at the
end of their first service life they can be
returned to the factory for refurbishment
before going back to work. L

t
Features
B Fully compliant with US Navy
specifications
D
B Wide range of standard and custom Swivel
sizes
B Low reaction and high energy options
B Operate floating or suspended
B Virtually indestructible LF
B No chain/tyre net required Beaded and integrated
B Non-marking even against white hulls end terminals
B Unsinkable design

Closed cell foam core Internal chains


Applications
B Cruise ships
B Container vessels
B Bulk cargo Reinforcement Fixings
B RoRo and ferries
B Oil and gas tankers
B General cargo
B Navy berths Polyurethane skin Serial number
B Ship-to-ship transfers

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–5

SEA GUARD®

Polyethylene foam core

Property Unit Typical result


Density 1 kg/m3 64 ± 6
1
Tensile strength kN/m2 >414
1
Elongation at break % >120
1
Compressive strength (50%) kN/m2 >140
1
Water absorption kg/m2 <1
Working temperature 2 ºC –30 to +70

Reinforcement filament

Property Unit Typical result


Material – 2520 denier nylon
Tensile strength (single filament) N 230
Elongation at break % 16
Helix angle degrees 45–60
Filament spacing mm <4

Polyurethane elastomer

Property Unit Typical result


Hardness 3 Shore A 75–95
4
Tensile strength (PU only) MPa >13.8
All physical properties are typical values which 4
Elongation at break (PU only) % >300
can be adjusted to suit specific applications.
4
Foam density can be increased for higher energy Tear strength kN/m >32
5
absorption or reduced for lower reaction force Flexural life (Ross) cycles >10000
and hull pressure. Additional reinforcement layers Abrasion resistance 6 NBS >100
can be added for extreme duty applications. The
polyurethane elastomer skin can be increased or
reduced in hardness to adjust friction and wear
resistance properties. The standard fender skin
colour is black. Orange, red and yellow skins are
Standards
widely specified for maximum visibility, grey is
common for navy applications and almost any other
1 ASTM D-3575 4 ASTM D-412
colour is available on special request. Please ask for
2 PPC-C-1752B 5 ASTM D-1052
further details.
3 ASTM D-2240 6 ASTM D-1630

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–6

SEA GUARD®
120
Nominal rated deflection may
vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
100

d
80
Reaction (%)

60 R 120
100
40 80

Energy (%)
60
20 40
20
0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
Deflection (%)

1.6
For increased energy use High, Extra High or Super High
1.54
capacity foam grades. For reduced hull pressure use Low
1.5 LR & STD
Reaction foam grade. HC
1.45
EHC
Foam grades E Ratio 1.4
SHC
Correction factor (relative to 3rd cycle)

Low Reaction LR 0.6


1.3
Standard STD 1.0
High Capacity HC 1.3
1.2
Extra High Capacity EHC 1.9
Super High Capacity SHC 2.6 1.1

1.0
Calculation example
0.9
Determine the 1st cycle performance for SeaGuard
2000 × 4000 (LR) 0.8

E3-STD = 3rd cycle energy for STD grade = 540kNm 0.7


R3-STD = 3rd cycle reaction for STD grade = 1005kN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 89 10 50 100

P3-STD = 3rd cycle hull pressure for STD grade = 172kN/m2 Compression cycle

FR = Foam Ratio for LR grade = 0.6


N1 = 1st cycle compression ratio = 1.3
Caution
E1-LR = 1st cycle energy for LR grade = E3-STD × FR × N1 Fender selection should not be based
= 540 × 0.6 × 1.3 = 421kNm on 1st cycle performance. Always use
R1-LR = 1st cycle reaction for LR grade = R3-STD × FR × N1 ≥3rd cycle performance depending on
= 1005 × 0.6 × 1.3 = 784kN application, required safety factors and
P1-LR = 1st cycle pressure for LR grade = P3-STD × FR × N1 other parameters.
= 172 × 0.6 × 1.3 = 134.6kN/m2

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–7

SEA GUARD®
Performance at 60% deflection, STD Grade, 3rd cycle

Diameter × Length Energy Reaction Pressure Energy Reaction Pressure Weight


(mm) (ft) (kNm) (kN) (kN/m2) (ft-kip) (kip) (ksf) (kg) (lb)
700 × 1500 2.3 × 4.9 26 133 172 19 30 3.6 109 240
1000 × 1500 3.3 × 4.9 47 173 172 35 39 3.6 147 325
1000 × 2000 3.3 × 6.5 68 254 172 50 57 3.6 200 440
1200 × 2000 3.9 × 6.5 91 280 172 67 63 3.6 299 660
1350 × 2500 4.4 × 8.2 152 418 172 112 94 3.6 426 940
1500 × 3000 4.9 × 9.8 232 578 172 171 130 3.6 653 1440
1700 × 3000 5.6 × 9.8 282 618 172 208 139 3.6 748 1650
2000 × 3500 6.5 × 11.5 454 845 172 335 190 3.6 1161 2560
2000 × 4000 6.5 × 13.1 540 1005 172 398 226 3.6 1397 3080
2000 × 4500 6.5 × 14.7 624 1161 172 460 261 3.6 1571 3465
2500 × 4000 8.2 × 13.1 801 1197 172 591 269 3.6 1925 4245
2500 × 5500 8.2 × 18.0 1200 1788 172 885 402 3.6 3059 6745
3000 × 4900 9.8 × 16.0 1430 1775 172 1055 399 3.6 3295 7265
3000 × 6000 9.8 × 19.7 1851 2295 172 1365 516 3.6 4370 9635
3300 × 4500 10.8 × 14.7 1498 1690 172 1105 380 3.6 3531 7785
3300 × 6500 10.8 × 21.3 2421 2731 172 1786 614 3.6 5485 12095

Diameter × Length Energy Reaction Pressure Energy Reaction Pressure Weight


(ft) (mm) (kNm) (kN) (kN/m2) (ft-kip) (kip) (ksf) (kg) (lb)
2×4 610 × 1220 15 89 172 11 20 3.6 86 190
2×6 610 × 1830 24 147 172 18 33 3.6 118 260
2×8 610 × 2440 34 209 172 25 47 3.6 150 330
3×6 910 × 1830 53 214 172 39 48 3.6 168 370
3×8 910 × 2440 75 302 172 55 68 3.6 254 560
3 × 10 910 × 3050 96 391 172 71 88 3.6 331 730
4×6 1220 × 1830 81 249 172 60 56 3.6 283 625
4×8 1220 × 2440 121 369 172 89 83 3.6 374 825
4 × 10 1220 × 3050 160 494 172 118 111 3.6 476 1050
4 × 12 1220 × 3660 198 605 172 146 136 3.6 658 1450
5×8 1520 × 2440 183 445 172 135 100 3.6 476 1050
5 × 10 1520 × 3050 244 596 172 180 134 3.6 680 1500
5 × 12 1520 × 3660 305 743 172 225 167 3.6 816 1800
5 × 14 1520 × 4270 365 890 172 269 200 3.6 1134 2500
6 × 12 1830 × 3660 407 827 172 300 186 3.6 1122 2475
6 × 16 1830 × 4880 579 1179 172 427 265 3.6 1701 3750
6 × 20 1830 × 6100 751 1530 172 554 344 3.6 2426 5350
7 × 14 2130 × 4270 660 1152 172 487 259 3.6 1678 3700
7 × 16 2130 × 4880 778 1357 172 574 305 3.6 1995 4400
7 × 20 2130 × 6100 1013 1766 172 747 397 3.6 2857 6300
8 × 14 2440 × 4270 839 1281 172 619 288 3.6 2132 4700
8 × 16 2440 × 4880 994 1517 172 733 341 3.6 2449 5400
8 × 20 2440 × 6100 1303 1988 172 961 447 3.6 3447 7600
9 × 18 2740 × 5490 1399 1899 172 1032 427 3.6 3288 7250
9 × 22 2740 × 6710 1787 2424 172 1318 545 3.6 4762 10500
10 × 16 3050 × 4880 1466 1788 172 1081 402 3.6 3370 7430
10 × 18 3050 × 5490 1706 2082 172 1258 468 3.6 3839 8465
10 × 20 3050 × 6100 1946 2375 172 1435 534 3.6 4535 10000
10 × 22 3050 × 6710 2186 2669 172 1612 600 3.6 5351 11800
11 × 18 3350 × 5490 2009 2229 172 1482 501 3.6 4512 9950
11 × 22 3350 × 6710 2590 2874 172 1910 646 3.6 5805 12800
12 × 24 3660 × 7320 3518 3781 172 2595 850 3.6 7324 16150
13 × 26 3960 × 7920 4393 4381 172 3240 985 3.6 9116 20100
14 × 28 4270 × 8530 5423 5026 172 4000 1130 3.6 10884 24000
Performances and weights apply to STD Grade foam.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–8

SEA GUARD®
Angular compression factors
100 100
α = 35°
deflection
θ
80 α
80 θ = 5°
α = 15°
Energy Factor – AFV (%)

Energy Factor – AFL (%)


θ = 0°
60 60
deflection
θ = 10°

α = 0°
40 40

20 20

0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Deflection (%) Deflection (%)

Mooring applications Mounting area


D

HW

0.8–1.0D

LW
0.5–0.7D

Floating or suspended

0.18–0.4D

HW

LW
Supporting structures must be large enough to
cope with tides and the fender footprint when
compressed.
Guide rail

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–9

SEA GUARD®

Proven
in practice

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–10

SEA
CUSHION®
SeaCushion fenders are designed
for hard work. The superior grade of
foam core, an extra tough skin plus
chain-tyre net make SeaCushions
the most rugged floating fender on
the market.
This means SeaCushions are
perfect for the most demanding
applications: open water ship-to-ship
operations, offshore structures or
anywhere needing absolute fender
reliability. Whatever else happens,
SeaCushion will not deflate, burst or
sink.
Efficiency is excellent too. For the L
same energy, SeaCushion fenders
have lower reactions than pneumatic
types. Hull pressures are very low
too at just 172kN/m2 for STD-grades
(even less for LR-grades) – well within
PIANC guidelines for LNG vessels. Overall
D
Diameter

Features
B Ultra-tough, unsinkable design
B Wide range of standard and
custom sizes
B Low reaction and high energy
options Unsinkable Chain-tyre
B Low hull pressures foam core net
B Maintains safe stand-off distances
B Low maintenance
B Well proven design
Filament Various
reinforcement mooring
matrix options
Applications
B LNG and oil terminals
B Ship-to-ship operations
B Offshore boat landings Tough Unique
B Shipyards polyurethane serial
skin number
B Military applications

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–11

SEA CUSHION®
Performance at 60% deflection, STD Grade, 3rd cycle

Diameter × Length Overall Diameter Energy Reaction Pressure Energy Reaction Pressure Weight (with net)
(ft) (mm) (ft) (mm) (kNm) (kN) (kN/m2) (ft-kip) (kip) (ksf) (kg) (lb)
3’ × 6’ 915 × 1830 4.9 1500 49 249 172 36 56 3.6 687 1515
4’ × 8’ 1220 × 2440 5.9 1800 115 436 172 85 98 3.6 1120 2470
5’ × 10’ 1525 × 3050 7.3 2200 222 676 172 164 152 3.6 1850 4080
6’ × 12’ 1830 × 3660 8.3 2500 382 965 172 282 217 3.6 2222 4900
7’ × 14’ 2135 × 4270 9.3 2800 603 1308 172 445 294 3.6 3157 6961
8’ × 12’ 2440 × 3660 10.3 3100 630 1192 172 465 268 3.6 3108 6853
8’ × 16’ 2440 × 4875 10.3 3100 896 1695 172 661 381 3.6 4285 9448
9’ × 18’ 2745 × 5490 11.3 3400 1270 2135 172 937 480 3.6 5989 13206
10’ × 16’ 3050 × 4875 12.3 3700 1323 2002 172 976 450 3.6 5360 11819
10’ × 20’ 3050 × 6100 12.3 3700 1735 2624 172 1280 590 3.6 6893 15200
11’ × 22’ 3350 × 6700 13.3 4100 2301 3163 172 1697 711 3.6 8391 18503
12’ × 24’ 3660 × 7320 14.3 4400 2977 3754 172 2196 844 3.6 12298 27118
13’ × 26’ 3960 × 7920 15.3 4700 3775 4390 172 2784 987 3.6 14649 32300
14’ × 28’ 4270 × 8535 16.3 5000 4581 5018 172 3379 1128 3.6 16538 36466

Diameter × Length Overall Diameter Energy Reaction Pressure Energy Reaction Pressure Weight (with net)
(mm) (ft) (ft) (mm) (kNm) (kN) (kN/m2) (ft-kip) (kip) (ksf) (kg) (lb)
1000 × 2000 3.3’ × 6.6’ 5.2 1600 65 298 172 48 67 3.6 741 1634
1200 × 2000 3.9’ × 6.6’ 5.8 1800 87 338 172 64 76 3.6 956 2108
1350 × 2500 4.4’ × 8.2’ 6.3 1900 140 485 172 103 109 3.6 1197 2639
1500 × 3000 4.9’ × 9.8’ 7.2 2200 210 649 172 155 146 3.6 1810 3992
1700 × 3000 5.6’ × 9.8’ 7.9 2400 266 721 172 196 162 3.6 1995 4399
2000 × 3500 6.6’ × 11.5’ 8.9 2700 430 988 172 317 222 3.6 2346 5173
2000 × 4000 6.6’ × 13.1’ 8.9 2700 503 1152 172 371 259 3.6 2566 5658
2200 × 4500 7.2’ × 14.8’ 9.5 2900 678 1428 172 500 321 3.6 3341 7367
2500 × 4000 8.2’ × 13.1’ 10.5 3200 733 1357 172 541 305 3.6 3371 7433
2500 × 5500 8.2’ × 18.0’ 10.5 3200 1075 1988 172 793 447 3.6 4684 10329
3000 × 6000 9.8’ × 19.7’ 12.1 3700 1645 2540 172 1213 571 3.6 6808 15012
3300 × 4500 10.8’ × 14.8’ 13.1 4000 1365 1913 172 1007 430 3.6 5521 12174
3300 × 6500 10.8’ × 21.3’ 13.1 4000 2144 3003 172 1581 675 3.6 8073 17800
4200 × 8400 13.8’ × 27.6’ 16.1 4900 4504 4933 172 3322 1109 3.6 16330 36008
Performances and weights apply to STD Grade foam.

120 For increased energy use High, Extra


Nominal rated deflection may High or Super High capacity foam
vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
grades. For reduced hull pressure
100
use Low Reaction foam grade.
d
80 Foam grades E Ratio
Reaction (%)

120 Low Reaction LR 0.6


60 R
100 Standard STD 1.0

80 High Capacity HC 1.3


40
Energy (%)

60 Extra High Capacity EHC 1.9

20 40 Super High Capacity SHC 2.6


20
Refer to SeaGuard (p5–6) for nth cycle
0 0 performance correction factors.
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
Deflection (%)

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–12

SEA CUSHION®
Angular compression factors
100 100
α = 35°
deflection
θ
80 α
80 θ = 5°
α = 15°
Energy Factor – AFV (%)

Energy Factor – AFL (%)


θ = 0°
60 60
deflection
θ = 10°

α = 0°
40 40

20 20

0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Deflection (%) Deflection (%)

Fender-to-fender mooring
and other variations are
also possible

VB

Overall
Diameter
D

0.8–1.0D

0.3–0.4D
0.5–0.7D
Many other methods of mooring and attachment
are possible. Please ask for further details.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–13

SEA CUSHION®

Proven
in practice

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–14

DONUT
FENDERS
Donut Fenders are an effective
solution for simple berthing dolphins,
guiding and turning structures. The
buoyant Donut floats up and down a
single tubular pile and freely rotates
to help align or redirect ships.
The internal casing has long
lasting, low-friction bearings which
need minimal maintenance. The
foam is unsinkable and cannot
burst or deflate. The Donut skin is
durable polyurethane reinforced with
continuous nylon filaments.
Donut Fenders are custom
designed for every application. They
can have supplementary buoyancy to overall diameter
present a raised contact face. The
body can be additionally protected
with SeaTimber rubbing strips to
cope with ferry beltings. Bright
colours are often used to improve
visibility and safety.

Features
B Freely rotates around a pile
B Rises and falls with water level
B Fast to install free rotation
B Requires minimal maintenance draft about centre
tidal
B High performance
range
B Low hull pressures
B Will not mark ship hulls Nylon reinforced
Low-friction
polyurethane skin
bearings
Options
B Additional buoyancy tanks to raise
fender height
B Trim tanks to adjust and trim draft
B Various netting options for heavy
duty applications

Applications
B Corner protection
B Turning structures
B Lead-in jetties
seabed
B Simple breasting dolphins
Flexible
B Bridge protection closed-cell
B RoRo berths Steel foam
pile

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–15

DONUT FENDERS
Dimensions and performance

Donut size D Maximum pile ØP Energy* Reaction* Energy† Reaction† D


mm ft mm ft kNm kN ft-kip kip δF‡ ØP
1270 4.2 610 2.0 7.2 116 1.6 7.9
1450 4.8 710 2.3 9.2 131 2.1 9.0
1520 5.0 762 2.5 10.5 140 2.4 9.6
1780 5.8 914 3.0 14.1 162 3.2 11.1
1910 6.3 995 3.3 16.4 175 3.7 12.0
2030 6.7 1067 3.5 18.6 186 4.2 12.8
2210 7.3 1185 3.9 22.3 204 5.0 14.0 H
2290 7.5 1219 4.0 23.6 210 5.3 14.4
2490 8.2 1345 4.4 28.0 229 6.3 15.7
2540 8.3 1372 4.5 29.3 234 6.6 16.0
2790 9.2 1524 5.0 35.3 256 7.9 17.6
2970 9.8 1636 5.4 40.1 273 9.0 18.7
3050 10.0 1676 5.5 42.1 280 9.5 19.2
3300 10.8 1829 6.0 49.5 304 11.1 20.8
3450 11.3 1933 6.3 54.6 319 12.3 21.9
3530 11.6 1981 6.5 57.2 327 12.9 22.4
3810 12.5 2134 7.0 65.9 350 14.8 24.0 Increasing Donut height (H)
3960 13.0 2241 7.4 72.1 366 16.2 25.1 will increase reaction and
4060 13.3 2286 7.5 75.1 374 16.9 25.6 energy proportionately.
4220 13.8 2388 7.8 81.3 389 18.3 26.7

Performances are based on STD grade foam.


Non-standard sizes available on request. Contact Trelleborg Marine Systems for more details.
* values for H = 1000mm.

values for H = 1 foot.
‡ all performances at δF = 60% of Donut resilient foam wall thickness.

120
Nominal rated deflection may
vary at RPD. Refer to p12–35.
100

80
Reaction (%)

60 120
100
40 80
Energy (%)

60
20 40
20
0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
Deflection (%)

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–16

DONUT FENDERS

Applications
Breasting dolphins Corner protection

Guiding structures

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–17

DONUT FENDERS

Proven
in practice

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–18

SEAFLOAT
SeaFloat® buoys are resilient
surface floats for inland waterways,
navigation channels and offshore
applications. Various types of
SeaFloat are available, each sharing
the same robust construction and
high performance materials.
They also offer significant
advantages over conventional steel
buoys. SeaFloat buoys are lighter
and easier to handle. They offer
better corrosion resistance. Being
foam filled, SeaFloats will never sink
or burst. They can even withstand
collisions by passing vessels with
little risk of damage.

Upper end fitting


(various options
Resilient
available)
outer foam

Rigid inner
foam

Reinforced
Internal urethane elastomer
steel core skin
Load distribution
plates
Lower end fitting
(mooring eye shown)

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–19

SEAFLOAT
Dimensions and performance

SeaFloat buoys are usually custom designed for each application. The following examples are of typical configurations. For custom
buoys or those not listed below, please contact Trelleborg Marine Systems.

Net Buoy Overall Ht. flotation Overall Working


Model
Type buoyancy weight diameter section height load
number (kg) (kg) (m) (m) (m) (tonne)

Support buoys
SB-400 400 150 0.9 n/a 0.9 10
SB-750 750 170 1.1 n/a 1.1 10
SB-1000 1000 290 1.2 n/a 1.2 18
SB-1500 1500 330 1.4 n/a 1.4 18
SB-2000 2000 450 1.5 n/a 1.5 18
SB-4000 4000 680 1.8 n/a 1.8 20
Utility buoys
UF-45 45 25 0.4 n/a 0.6 2.3
UF-90 90 30 0.5 n/a 0.8 2.3
UF-140 140 40 0.5 n/a 0.8 2.3
UF-225 225 60 0.6 n/a 0.9 3.4
UF-450 450 90 0.7 n/a 1.2 4.5
UF-700 700 110 0.8 n/a 1.5 4.5
UF-900 900 200 0.9 n/a 1.5 9.1
UF-1350 1350 340 1.2 n/a 1.9 9.1
Pendant buoys
PBCT-4500 4500 1000 1.7 2.5 2.5 68
PBCT-7000 7000 1300 1.9 2.8 2.7 68
PBCT-9000 9000 1700 2.1 3.1 3.0 68
PBCT-14000 14000 2300 2.4 3.6 3.2 68
PBCT-18000 18000 3000 2.6 3.9 3.4 91
PBCT-23000 23000 3900 2.8 4.1 3.6 91
Mooring buoys
MB-2250 2250 860 1.9 1.3 2.3 45
MB-5000 5000 1400 2.5 1.5 2.6 68
MB-7000 7000 1900 2.8 1.5 2.6 91
MB-9000 9000 2400 3.0 1.7 2.8 91
MB-11000 11000 2700 3.2 1.8 2.9 91
MB-14000 14000 3400 3.4 2.1 3.2 136
MB-16000 16000 3800 3.6 2.2 3.3 136
MB-18000 18000 4100 3.7 2.3 3.4 136
MB-22000 22000 4700 3.9 2.5 2.6 136
MB-34000 34000 6400 4.2 3.2 4.3 136
MB-45000 45000 8000 4.2 4.1 5.2 136

Performance may vary due to operating temperature, compression speed, material properties and dimensional tolerances.
Please ask for more details.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–20

SEAFLOAT

Built to last
Reinforced elastomer skin
SeaFloat buoys have a nylon filament reinforced
polyurethane skin which has excellent resistance to water,
oil, ice, strong sunlight and abrasive surfaces. It remains
flexible even at -40°C (-40°F) making it suitable for
Tropical or Arctic operations.

Energy absorbing
The SeaFloat buoy absorbs impact energy so colliding
vessels will not damage the buoy or themselves.

Unsinkable foam
Only closed-cell foams are used in SeaFloat buoys. The
closed-cell matrix of the foam means it does not absorb
water even if cut or damaged. This makes SeaFloat buoys
impossible to sink.

Permanent colours
The polyurethane skin is pigmented through its entire
thickness, so colours will not wear off and will never
need repainting. A wide choice of bright colours can help
improve safety and identification.

Custom engineered Optional fitting


Every SeaFloat is engineered to suit the application. We
can advise on operating needs, load requirements and
other features to suit every case. End fittings
A variety of SeaFloat end fittings are available. All are
made of steel – either galvanised or painted to protect
against corrosion.

Forged eye Swivel eye Padeye Bail

Quick release Pick-up Tee Hawse Pipe Hawse Pipe &


hook Capture Plate

Quality
SeaFloats must be reliable. We closely monitor all raw
materials and manufacturing processed from start to
finish for a highly dependable, long lasting product. At the
end of their service lives, most buoys can be returned to
the factory where they can be remanufactured ‘as good
as new’.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


5–21

SEAFLOAT

Proven
in practice

Mooring buoy Instrumentation buoy

Anchor pendant buoy Hose end marker buoy

Workboat backdown buoy Lighted mooring buoy

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S05-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


Engineered
Plastics
Section 6

Trelleborg Marine Systems


UHMW-PE
Sliding Fenders
SeaPile
SeaTimber
www.trelleborg.com/marine SeaCamel
Ecoboard
Ref. M1100-S06-V1.2-EN
6–2

UHMW-PE
FACINGS
Trelleborg FQ1000 ultra high
molecular weight polyethylene
(UHMW-PE) is the first choice
material for facing steel fender
panels and other heavy duty
applications. It combines very
low friction with excellent impact
strength and a wear resistance much
better than steel.
Most popular is FQ1000-DS
which is ‘double-sintered’ and work-
hardened for extra durability. The
standard colour is black, but if other
colours are needed then FQ1000-V
‘virgin’ grade also comes in yellow,
white, grey, blue, green and red.
FQ1000 UHMW-PE materials are
compounded to resist ozone and UV
radiation. They do not degrade or rot
and are easily recycled at the end of
their useful service life.

Features
B Very low friction coefficient Relative Abrasion
B Excellent abrasion resistance
B UV and ozone resistant
B Does not rot, split or crack
B 100% recyclable
FQ1000V =
100

Applications
B Fender panel (frame) face pads
B Rubbing strips
B V-fender shields
B Lock entrance and wall protection
B Bridge buttress protection
B Beltings on workboats
FQ1000V
Nylon 6-6

HMW-PE

HD-PE

Refer to Section 12 (Fender


PTFE

SS304

Mild Steel

Design) for guidance on using


Ekki

Greenheart

UHMW-PE as a fender facing.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S06-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


6–3

UHMW-PE FACINGS
Typical Value Wear allowances
Property Test Method Unit
FQ1000-V FQ1000-DS
Density ISO 1183-1 g/cm3 0.94–0.95 0.95–0.96 W
Notched Impact ISO 11542-2 kJ/m2 140–170 100–130
Strength (Charpy) t
Abrasion Index ISO/DIS 15527(Draft) FQ1000V = 100 100–110 130–150
(Sand-slurry)

Yield Strength ISO/R 50mm/min N/mm2 15–20 15–20

Elongation ISO/R 50mm/min % >50 >50


at Break*
Dynamic Friction Pm = 1N/mm2 t W
– 0.15 0.15
(PE-Steel) V=10m/min 30 3–5
ISO 868 / DIN 53505
Hardness Shore D 63 63–66 40 7–10
3s value, 6mm sample
Operating 50 10–15
– °C –80 to +80 –80 to +80
Temperature
70 18–25
Thermal DIN 53752 K–1 ≈ 2 × 10–4 ≈ 2 × 10–4 100 28–40
Expansion
FQ1000-V is virgin grade material. Small increases in facing thickness can
FQ1000-DS is double sintered (regenerated) material. greatly extend service life for minimal
All values for black, UV stabilized material. extra cost.
Values for coloured materials will vary.
* Alternative test methods such as ASTM D638 give higher values circa 350%.

Typical dimensions

A B B B A
Steel panel Open structure Timber fixing

t≈30–150 D
~0.3t
D

always use oversize washers C

A 45–80
B 250–350
C 45–80
D 300–450
E 5–10
Dimensions will depend on pad thickness
and application.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S06-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


6–4

SLIDING
FENDERS
HD-PE Sliding Fenders are the ideal
alternative to timber facings with
the added advantage of low-friction
and better wear properties. HD-PE
does not split or decay and is totally
resistant to borers.
Environmentally friendly, HD-PE
can be used instead of tropical
hardwoods, lasts much longer, and
can be fully recycled at the end of its
useful life.

Features
B Low friction coefficient
B Resists marine borers
B High abrasion resistance
B UV and ozone resistant Concrete structure
B Does not rot, split or crack
B Easy to cut and drill
B 100% recyclable
L

Applications øD
B Fender pile rubbing strips
B Facing strips for berths
B Workboat beltings
B Lock protection ød
B Lock gate mitres

Steel structure Standard drilling diameters

D d L
27 13 75
32 16 85
32 12 32
32 16 45
32 18 80
40 20 80
Timber structure 50 21 95
50 23 95
60 21 70
65 27 105
70 28 110
70 32 115
70 26 50

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S06-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


6–5

SLIDING FENDERS
Flat Bolt
A B L C1 C2 D E F G H Weight
bar size
50 50 5500 25 n/a 32 16 0 50–100 n/a n/a M12 2.4
60 60 5500 30 n/a 32 16 0 50–100 n/a n/a M12 3.4
70 50 2500 25 32 32 16 0 75–125 250–300 n/a M12 3.3
70 70 6500 30 32 32 16 0 75–125 250–300 n/a M12 4.6
80 60 5000 30 32 32 16 0 75–125 250–300 n/a M12 4.5
100 50 5500 25 32 32 16 0 75–125 250–300 n/a M12 4.7
100 65 5500 30 32 32 16 0 75–125 250–300 n/a M12 6.1
100 100 6000 50 32 32 16 0 75–125 250–300 50 × 6 M12 9.3
120 80 5000 40 40 40 20 0 100–150 300–350 n/a M16 8.9
120 120 6000 60 40 40 20 0 100–150 300–350 80 × 10 M16 13.4
140 70 5500 35 40 40 20 0–50 100–150 300–350 n/a M16 9.1
160 70 5000 35 40 40 20 0–70 100–150 300–350 n/a M16 10.4
160 160 6000 80 40 40 20 0–80 100–150 300–350 80 × 10 M16 24.1
170 120 5500 60 40 40 20 0–80 100–150 300–350 80 × 10 M16 19.0
180 70 5000 35 46 50 23 0–80 125–175 350–450 n/a M20 11.7
180 180 6000 90 46 50 23 0–80 125–175 350–450 80 × 10 M20 30.2
190 110 5000 55 46 50 23 0–90 125–175 350–450 80 × 10 M20 19.4
200 75 5000 35 46 50 23 0–100 125–175 350–450 n/a M20 14.0
200 100 6000 50 46 50 23 0–100 125–175 350–450 80 × 10 M20 18.6
200 150 5500 75 46 50 23 0–100 125–175 350–450 80 × 10 M20 27.9
200 200 6000 100 46 50 23 0–100 125–175 350–450 80 × 10 M20 37.6
250 150 6500 75 56 65 28 0–130 150–200 450–550 80 × 10 M24 34.8
250 160 5000 80 56 65 28 0–130 150–200 450–550 80 × 10 M24 37.2
250 250 5000 125 56 65 28 0–130 150–200 450–550 100 × 10 M24 58.1
300 100 5500 50 56 65 28 0–160 150–200 450–550 n/a M24 27.9
300 210 5000 105 56 70 36 0–160 175–225 500–600 100 × 12 M30 58.6
300 300 5000 150 72 70 36 0–160 175–225 500–600 120 × 12 M30 84.6
440 160 2000 80 56 70 36 0–300 175–225 500–600 100 × 12 M30 66.8
Preferred sizes are in bold. Full or half lengths as standard. [ Units: mm, kg/m ]

B G H H B G H H
C1 C2 10
øE
øD
A F øE
A

Property Test method Typical results Unit


Density ISO 1183-1 0.91–0.94 g/cm3

Molecular weight Light diffusion method ~200,000 g/mol

Dynamic friction – 0.20–0.25 –

Yield strength DIN 53504 10–15 MPa

Shore hardness DIN 53505 48–50 Shore D


Abrasion index ISO/DIS 15527 (Draft) ~400 –
(sand slurry) FQ1000-V = 100
Operating temperature −50 to +50 °C

Thermal expansion DIN 53752 2 × 10−4 K−1

Property values are from tests on production materials. HD-PE is manufactured from a
blend of virgin and recycled stock which can cause limited variations in test results.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S06-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


6–6

SEAPILE® &
SEATIMBER®
SeaPile and SeaTimber are advanced
composite plastics with superior
properties to timber, steel and
concrete for many marine structures
and applications.
They can withstand heavy impacts
by absorption of energy through
recoverable deflection. SeaPile and
SeaTimber never rot, corrode or
decay. They are impervious to marine
borers, yet are totally non-polluting.
Manufactured from a recycled
plastic matrix with unique glass fibre
reinforcement bars, the stiffness of
SeaPile and SeaTimber can be varied
and controlled to suit each project.
This makes the material the ideal
choice for fenders, to build marine
structures, and for coastal protection
without damaging the environment.

Features
B Low lifecycle cost
B Will not rot, corrode or decay
B Unaffected by marine borers
B Choice of modulus to suit different
applications
B Can be pile driven, sawn and drilled
B Low friction coefficient Durable low
B Ultra low maintenance friction skin
B Custom colours available
B Unlimited lengths*
SeaTimber 100% recycled
plastic matrix

Applications
B Fender piles and systems
B Structural piles
B Bridge protection
B Guidewalls and locks
B Corner fenders
B Dolphins
SeaPile
B Navigation markers
B Walings and bullrails
Fibreglass
* subject to transport restrictions reinforcements

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S06-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


6–7

SEAPILE® & SEATIMBER®

SeaPile
SeaPile Diameter Rebar Size Yield Weight
section inch mm quantity inch mm lb/in2 MPa lb/ft kg/m
10 (6-1) 1 25 4300 29.65 24–29 36–43
10 (6-1.25) 6 1.25 32 5837 40.24 25–31 37–46
10 (6-1.375) 1.375 35 6766 46.65 26–32 39–48
10 (8-1) 1 25 5431 37.45 25–35 37–52
10 254
10 (8-1.25) 1.25 32 7482 51.59 26–32 39–48
10 (8-1.375) 8 1.375 35 8720 60.12 27–33 40–49
10 (8-1.5) 1.5 38 10036 69.20 28–35 42–52
10 (8-1.625) 1.625 41 11424 78.77 29–36 43–54
13 (8-1) 1 25 3842 26.49 39–48 58–71
13 (8-1.25) 8 1.25 32 5207 35.90 41–50 61–74
13 (8-1.375) 1.375 35 6028 41.56 42–51 63–76
13 (12-1) 1 25 5365 36.99 41–50 61–74
13 330
13 (12-1.25) 1.25 32 7413 51.11 43–53 64–79
13 (12-1.375) 12 1.375 35 8643 59.59 45–55 67–82
13 (12-1.5) 1.5 38 9947 68.58 46–57 68–85
13 (12-1.625) 1.625 41 11315 78.01 48–59 71–88
16 (16-1) 1 25 4928 33.98 61–74 91–110
16 (16-1.25) 1.25 32 6785 46.78 64–78 95–116
16 (16-1.375) 1.375 35 7899 54.46 66–81 98–121
16 406 16
16 (16-1.5) 1.5 38 9078 62.59 68–83 101–124
16 (16-1.625) 1.625 41 10313 71.11 70–86 104–128
16 (16-1.75) 1.75 44 11599 79.97 73–89 109–132
Modulus, stiffness and other material properties are available on request.

SeaTimber
SeaTimber Height Width Rebar Size Yield X-X Yield Y-Y Weight
section inch mm inch mm qty inch mm lb/in2 MPa lb/in2 MPa lb/ft kg/m
12 × 8 (No rebar) – – – 860 5.93 860 5.93 25–31 37–46
12 × 8 (4-1) 1 25 3868 26.67 3421 23.59 26–32 39–48
12 × 8 (4-1.25) 1.25 32 5155 35.54 4381 30.21 27–33 40–49
12 × 8 (4-1.375) 12 305 8 203 1.375 35 5928 40.87 4964 34.23 28–34 42–51
4
12 × 8 (4-1.5) 1.5 38 6746 46.51 5588 38.53 28–35 42–52
12 × 8 (4-1.625) 1.625 41 7606 52.44 6250 43.09 29–35 43–52
12 × 8 (4-1.75) 1.75 44 8501 58.61 6948 47.90 29–36 43–54
10 × 10 (No rebar) – – – 860 5.93 860 5.93 27–33 40–49
10 × 10 (4-1) 1 25 3443 23.74 3443 23.74 28–35 42–52
10 × 10 (4-1.25) 1.25 32 4517 31.14 4517 31.14 29–36 43–54
10 × 10 (4-1.375) 10 254 10 254 1.375 35 5163 35.6 5163 35.60 30–36 45–54
4
10 × 10 (4-1.5) 1.5 38 5849 40.33 5849 40.33 30–37 45–55
10 × 10 (4-1.625) 1.625 41 6571 45.31 6571 45.31 31–38 46–57
10 × 10 (4-1.75) 1.75 44 7325 50.5 7325 50.5 31–38 46–57
12 × 12 (No rebar) – – – 860 5.93 860 5.93 39–47 58–70
12 × 12 (4-1) 1 25 2706 18.66 2706 18.66 40–49 60–73
12 × 12 (4-1.25) 1.25 32 3466 23.90 3466 23.90 41–50 61–74
12 305 12 305
12 × 12 (4-1.375) 4 1.375 35 3923 27.05 3923 27.05 41–51 61–76
12 × 12 (4-1.5) 1.5 38 4406 30.38 4406 30.38 42–51 63–76
12 × 12 (4-1.625) 1.625 41 4914 33.88 4914 33.88 42–52 63–77
Modulus, stiffness and other material properties are available on request.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S06-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


6–8

SEAPILE® & SEATIMBER®

Lifecycle cost

s
re
u
ct
ru
st
n
de
o
Wo
Relative costs

Break-even
in 6 years
SeaPile

0
0 5 10 15 20 25
Years

SeaPile and SeaTimber cost far less during the lifetime of a structure because they need little if any maintenance.
Real comparisons with timber structures show the break-even point is just six years, sometimes far less.

SeaPile and SeaTimber can resist


greater loads and deflections than
wood, concrete and steel. When
tested to ultimate load, SeaPile
and SeaTimber absorb 15 times
d
ce

Based on the energy of Southern Yellow


or

250×250mm
f
in

test sections Pine. In practical terms this means


re

less damage, maintenance and


FG
r–
Load

downtime, leading to a lower lifecycle


be

cost.
im
aT
Se

d
force
– unrein
b er
m
aTi
Se

ellow Pine
hern Y
Sout

Deflection

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S06-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


6–9

SEAPILE® & SEATIMBER®

Installation

Piling Cutting Drilling

Various connecting methods are available to increase pile length. SeaPile and SeaTimber lengths can also be attached
to steel pile extensions. A DVD explaining SeaPile and SeaTimber handling and installation methods is available.

Pile driving data


4
Soil profile Pile length 15.2m, flat cut ends, no drive shoe, no drive helmet, hammer: MKT 9B3
Pile length 16.8m, with drive shoe and drive helmet, hammer: MKT 9B3

6
Very loose
sand and silt

8
Tip elevation = 9.7 metres
Depth (metres)

10
Dense to very
dense layered
clayey sand
and sandy clay
12

14 Bottom of
test boring
Tip elevation = 14.9 metres

16
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Hammer blows per metre

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S06-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


6–10

SEAPILE® & SEATIMBER®

Applications
The SeaPile can generally be used in the same applications as traditional timber piling. Examples include:

Dolphins Fender piling Light structural piling

Wale

Dock
Chock

Pile
3-pile 7-pile 19-pile
cluster cluster cluster

Dolphins, or groups of piles, are Piles are used extensively as vertical Piles are used to support the loads
placed near piers and wharves to fenders set out in front of a marine of light-duty piers and wharves.
guide vessels into their moorings, structure. During the berthing of a Structural piling generally uses
to fend them away from structures, ship, fender piles act as a buffer bracing between piles to increase
or to serve as mooring points. to absorb and dissipate the impact the strength and stiffness of the
Compared with timber, considerably energy of the ship. They also provide foundation for the structure.
fewer SeaPiles are needed to absorb a barrier to prevent vessels from
the same impact energy. going underneath the pier.

Navigational aids Bridge pier protection

Piles and dolphins are widely used to create protective structures for bridge
piers, and to guide vessels into the channel and away from bridge supports.
3-pile clusters are used in impact zones, single piles in less vulnerable areas.
Bridge

Bridge
Pier

Pier

Single piles or dolphins are used Centreline of channel


to support lights, daybeacons, fog
signals and radar beacons.
Bridge

Bridge
Pier

Pier

Refer to the SeaPile and


SeaTimber Design Manual for
more information and examples. Centreline of bridge

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S06-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


6–11

SEAPILE® & SEATIMBER®

Proven
in practice

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S06-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


6–12

SEACAMEL®
Floating camels are used in many
military and commercial ports to
maintain standoff between the
vessel and pier face. They also
transmit forces over a greater length
of structure to avoid concentrated
loads.
SeaCamels are constructed from
SeaPile, SeaTimber or Ecoboard
engineered plastics, which combine
high strength with positive buoyancy
and will not crush, split, corrode or
decay.
SeaCamels are available in many
configurations, either preassembled
or in kit form. They can be fitted with
access decks and face fenders as
well as a variety of mooring options.

hawse pipe

SeaPile
(up to 400mm
diameter)

mooring
chain

anchor
weight

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S06-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


6–13

SEACAMEL®
non-slip
fibreglass deck

ultra-low maintenance
SeaTimber construction
additional buoyancy
tanks if required

Lengths up to 11.8m can be containerised for easy shipment.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S06-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


6–14

ECOBOARD®
Ecoboard structures outlast any wood or ‘wood flour’
plastic composites, lowering your costs for years to come.
Ecoboard is maintenance-free and needs zero care, and
because Ecoboard doesn’t deteriorate even in extreme
environments, the ongoing cost of treating and repairing
materials becomes a thing of the past.
Ecoboard is durable and versatile. The SR and SF
grades are both based on the same 100% recycled and
carefully graded polyethylene which is non-toxic and
stable. Whether strengthened with chopped glass fibres
(SF) or with high performance glass fibre rebars (SR),
Ecoboard comes in many standard and custom sections
to suit light, medium and heavy duty applications.
Ecoboard looks great too. With a choice of natural
or textured finishes in popular UV-stabilised colours,
designers can be confident that their Ecoboard structures
will stay looking good for decades to come – no cracking
or chipping, no warping or corrosion, no mould or decay.
And if that still isn’t enough to convince you to use
Ecoboard for your next project then maybe Trelleborg’s 50
year limited warranty will.

Materials Wood Composite Ecoboard®

50 year warranty 33
Ecoboard
Ecoboard is made from recycled Insect and borer resistant 33
polyethylene, reinforced with
chopped glass fibre or GRP Rot and decay resistant 3* 3* 33
rebars. It doesn’t rot, split or
chip, and is ideal for long term Load bearing and structural 33 33
immersion in water.
Non-splintering 3 33
Timber composites Low friction 33
Timber composites are wood
‘flour’ in a plastic matrix. They Maintenance free 33
overcome some disadvantages
of natural timber but composites Colour stability 33
will still decay and rot over time,
particularly when damp.
Non-leaching/toxin-free 33
100% recycled feedstock 33
Wood
All wood suffers environmental
Recyclable 3 3 33
attack, sometimes reduced by Long-term aesthetics 33
periodic chemical treatments.
Wood can crack, split and splinter, Precurving and forming 3 3 33
is eaten by borers and suffers
fungal and bacterial decay. * Chemical treatments required.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S06-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


6–15

ECOBOARD®

Joists & spans Sizes


Ecoboard’s different grades give the right amounts of Nominal Finished Max length Weight
Profile
(mm) (mm) (m) (kg/m)
flexibility and strength just where they are needed.
Round 76 76 3.0 4.0

Ecoboard SF
Ec 102 102 3.0 5.5
Chopped glass fibre reinforced
Ch 127 127 4.6 11.3
polyethylene
po 152 152 9.1 16.2
Greater strength and modulus allows
Gr 216 216 9.1 32.7
larger unsupported spans and
la
254 254 9.1 45.5
fewer joists. Perfect for municipal
fe
305 305 7.6 65.5
structures and medium to heavy duty
constructions. Square 51 × 51 38 × 38 3.0 1.3
102 × 102 89 × 89 3.7 6.4
152 × 152 140 × 140 4.9 15.9
Ecoboard SR
Ec 203 × 203 191 × 191 6.1 32.7
100% polyethylene with fibreglass
10
Rectangular 32 × 152 32 × 140 3.7 3.9
reinforcement bars
re
32 × 254 32 × 241 3.7 6.8
Maximum structural strength for
M
bearing piles and large freespan
be 51 × 76 38 × 64 3.7 2.1
joists. The ultimate material for heavy
joi 51 × 102 38 × 89 4.9 3.1
duty, load-bearing structures. 51 × 152 38 × 140 6.1 4.8
51 × 203 38 × 191 4.9 6.4
51 × 254 38 × 241 5.5 8.0
51 × 305 38 × 292 3.7 9.8

Colours 76 × 102
76 × 152
64 × 89
64 × 140
3.7
3.7
5.1
7.9
76 × 203 64 × 191 4.9 10.9
76 × 254 64 × 267 5.5 13.7
76 × 305 64 × 292 3.7 16.7
102 × 152 89 × 140 3.7 11.0
102 × 203 89 × 191 3.7 14.7
102 × 254 89 × 241 3.7 19.0
102 × 305 89 × 292 5.5 23.2
ne
od
l
oa

152 × 203 140 × 191 3.7 23.8


wn

to
ite

te

da
o
arc

ds
dw
Sla

Bro
Wh

152 × 254 140 × 241 4.9 30.4


Ce

n
Ch

Re

Sa

152 × 305 140 × 292 4.9 36.0


Choose from our standard range, or ask about custom 203 × 254 191 × 241 4.9 41.4
colours. Slight variations may occur during manufacture. Tongue 51 × 254 38 × 230 5.5 8.0
& groove 51 × 305 38 × 285 3.7 9.8
76 × 254 64 × 230 5.5 13.7
Natural Knurled Wood 76 × 305 64 × 285 3.7 16.5
102 × 305 89 × 285 5.5 23.2
1 Other sizes, sections and lengths are available. Please ask.
2 Nominal sizes relate to industry standard descriptions for
Ecoboard’s natural finish is gently textured and pleasant lumber sections. Actual sizes should be used for design.
to the touch. The wood grain texture blends in well, whilst 3 Thermal expansion must be allowed for in designs.
the knurled texture provides a low-slip finish. 4 Weight may vary due to manufacturing methods and tolerances.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S06-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


6–16

ECOBOARD®

Design fabrication
B Chamfering
B Drilling and counterboring
B Shaping
B Pre-curving*

Trelleborg can supply everything from plain lengths to a


factory fabricated kit of parts, fully engineered and ready
for rapid site assembly. Please ask for details

* SF grades only.

Sustainability 50 Year Warranty


Sustai
Sustainability is about economic growth,
soc
social development and a healthy
environment. Within Trelleborg the
ethos of sustainability involves
everybody and everything we do
50 Year Limite
or make, becoming a natural part d War ranty for Ecob
oard®
of our daily business operations.
Ecoboard is a perfect example. Made from recycled
raw materials in a clean and energy efficient factory. It is
toxin-free, inert and non-polluting. Ecoboard is long lasting
but even at the end of it’s useful service life it can be fully
recycled and used again.
Visit www.trelleborg.com/sustainability to learn
more about Trelleborg’s efforts to build a sustainable
environment within a commercial world.

Please refer to your local office for full details of the


Ecoboard 50 Year Limited Warranty backed by Trelleborg.
Founded in 1905, Trelleborg now operates in 40
countries, employs over 22,000 people and has annual
sales of $4 billion.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S06-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


6–17

ECOBOARD®

Proven in practice

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S06-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


Tug Fenders

Section 7

Image courtesy of Sanmar

Trelleborg Marine Systems


Tug Cylindricals
M-Fenders
W-Fenders
Block Fenders
www.trelleborg.com/marine Composites
Extrusions
Ref. M1100-S07-V1.2-EN
7–2

TUG
FENDERS
Tug fenders must work harder, for
longer and under more extreme
conditions than any other fender
type. Tugs may be fitted with up to
four types of fender – each type
serving a particular application.
As many tugs become more
powerful, some exceeding 100t
bollard pull, choosing the right type,
size and arrangement of fenders
becomes critical.
When selecting fenders, designers
should consider: Cylindrical fenders Side beltings
Fitted to the bow/stern of D, Square and Wing-D fenders
B Bollard pull tugs and usually used to push are often used as side beltings
B Initial contact loads against flared hulls and in open to protect the vessel during
B Dynamic load effects sea conditions. escort duties and when coming
B Friction requirements alongside.
B Pushing angles Pushing fenders
B Hull attachment Block, Cube and W- and M- Transition Blocks
B Fender tolerances fenders provide large contact Transition Blocks are used to
B Material quality surfaces for low hull pressures. provide a smooth interface
B Spares availability Their grooved surfaces between side beltings and
provide exceptional grip. bow/stern fenders.
Contact your local office for further
information and advice.

ABAQUS Finite Element Analysis of true hull shapes and fender arrangements

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S07-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


7–3

TUG
CYLINDRICALS
Large cylindrical fenders are often
used as the primary pushing fenders
on the bow or stern of modern tugs.
Their round shape is ideal for working
with large bow flares (like container
ships), but are equally good for
pushing flat-sided vessels.
Tug Cylindricals come in diameters
to 1000mm and in very long
continuous or spigot-joined lengths.
A longitudinal chain runs down the
centre of the fender, supplemented øD ød A Bmax C øG øJ Weight
by circumferential straps or chains 250 125 200 570 500 190 75 45.5
which are recessed into grooves. 300 150 225 600 700 225 75 65.2
Tapered ends are also available. 380 190 280 650 800 280 100 105
400 200 300 670 800 300 100 116
450 225 300 700 850 350 100 147
500 250 300 730 900 375 100 181
600 300 350 800 900 450 125 255
800 400 350 930 1000 600 125 453
900 450 350 1000 1100 675 150 573
1000 500 350 1060 1200 750 150 707
Groove size varies according to attachment method. [ Units: mm, kg/m ]
Lengths 2–13m in one section, spigot joined for longer lengths.

d d
C
øJ

øG ød øD

A B B B
L

Attachment
Smaller fenders (≤500mm diameter) are
usually fixed by a longitudinal chain through
the bore of the fender, connected to the hull
by turnbuckles to tension the chain. Larger
fenders often use supplementary chains or Chain Strap
straps around the fender.

øD
Curve Radius øD
Tug Cylindrical fenders are made in straight R
lengths but can be pulled around the bow or R≥4 × øD R
stern radius.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S07-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


7–4

M-FENDERS
M-Fenders have a large and flexible
contact face which exerts a low
pressure during pushing operations.
The grooves provide extra grip
and the triple legs give a strong
attachment to the tug. M-Fenders
can also be fitted around tight
curves, whilst their relative low
weight adds to tug stability.

Features
B Heavy-duty design
B Triple-leg attachment
B Soft, flexible face
B Grooved for extra grip
B Low weight per m2
B Fits around tight bends
Dimensions Fixing

Applications Type A B C øD E F Lmax Weight Pin Flat bar Rmin


B All types of tug M400 400 200 40 23 50 150 2000 56 ø20 100 × 15 450
B Pontoon protection
B Special corner fenders M500 500 250 50 27 60 190 2000 89 ø24 125 × 20 550

M600 600 300 60 33 70 230 2000 132 ø30 150 × 20 650


Note: M-Fenders and W-Fenders are
M800 800 400 80 44 95 305 2100 235 ø40 150 × 20 900
not interchangeable.
[ Units: mm, kg/m ] [ Units: mm ]

900 B
A
800
M400 x 200
Reaction force (kN per metre)

700 M500 x 250 B


M600 x 300
600 øD C
E F F E
500
Intermediate
400 support when
L
L > 1000mm
300
Fixing pin
200 R (min)

100

0
0 20 40 60 80 100
Deflection (mm)

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S07-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


7–5

W-FENDERS
W-Fenders are made for the most
extreme operating conditions.
Originally developed by Trelleborg
Bakker, the W-Fender is one of the
most successful fenders for tugs
in the world today. It has a unique
‘open bore’ design which makes
installation very simple. The flexible
legs allow W-Fenders to be curved
around most hull shapes.

Features
B Extreme-duty design
B Twin-leg attachment
B Open bore for easy installation
B Grooved for extra grip
B Fits around tight bends
Dimensions Fixings

Applications Type A B C D E F K Lmax Weight Pin Flat bar Rmin


B Ocean-going tugs W32-20 320 200 280 180 100 67 50 2000 51 ø25 100 × 20 600
B Icebreakers
B Large harbour tugs W40-25 400 250 350 220 110 75 55 2000 81 ø30 120 × 20 800
B Bridge and pile protection W48-30 480 300 426 269 135 90 65 2000 120 ø40 140 × 20 900

W50-45 500 450 420 255 90 100 75 2000 180 ø40 150 × 20 1000
Note: M-Fenders and W-Fenders are
not interchangeable. [ Units: mm, kg/m ] [ Units: mm ]

600 A B

W32-20
500 W40-25 B
Reaction force (kN per metre)

W48-30
K F
400 E
D
C
300 Intermediate
L support when
L > 1000mm
200
Fixing pin

100 R (min)

0
0 20 40 60 80 100
Deflection (mm)

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S07-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


7–6

BLOCK
FENDERS
Block and Cube Fenders have a
traditional ‘keyhole’ profile which
is strong and ideal for heavy-duty
applications. There is a choice
of grooved or flat face fenders
depending on the required friction
levels. Where very low friction is
needed, Block and Cube Fenders can
also be made as Composite fenders
with integral UHMW-PE faces. This is
useful for tugs that operate in heavy
swell and storm conditions.
Block Fender dimensions Fixings

Features A B C øD E øG Lmax Weight Pin Flat bar Rmin


B Heavy-duty design 200 200 35 28 130 90 2000 33 ø25 100 × 15 450
B Traditional, proven shape 250 250 50 33 150 100 2000 54 ø30 125 × 20 600
B Grooved or smooth face 300 300 60 33 180 115 1750 80 ø30 150 × 20 800
B Optional UHMW-PE face 350 350 70 33 210 125 2000 114 ø30 175 × 25 1000
[ Units: mm, kg/m ] [ Units: mm ]

Note: M-, W-, Block and Cube fenders Cube Fender dimensions Fixings
are not interchangeable.
A B C øD E øG L Weight Pin Flat bar Rmin
250 250 50 33* 150 100 250 13 ø30* 125 × 20 600
300 300 60 33* 180 115 200 16 ø30* 150 × 25 800

* Optional 28mm and 25mm pin. [ Units: mm, kg ] [ Units: mm ]

900 B

200 x 200
800 A L
250 x 250
300 x 300
Reaction force (kN per metre)

700 øG
350 x 350
600 B øD

500 C
Intermediate
400 C E C support when
L
L > 1000mm
300
Fixing pin
200

100 R (min)

0
0 20 40 60 80 100
Deflection (mm)

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S07-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


7–7

COMPOSITE
FENDERS
Composite fenders* combine
rubber for resilience and UHMW-PE
for low-friction and wear resistant
properties. The two materials are
bonded with a special vulcanising
method – stronger and more reliable
than a mechanical joint. Composite
fenders are used where the
simplicity of extrusions are required
but with lower shear forces.

* Also called Rubbylene

CF-A series CF-B series

Flat Bolt Std Weight


A B øC* t øD E F G H bar size Length CF-A CF-B
100 100 30 20 15 25 10 90–130 200–300 50 × 6 M12 3000 10.3 11.1
150 150 65 20 20 30 12 110–150 250–350 60 × 8 M16 3000 21.5 27.0
165 125 65 20 20 35 15 110–150 250–350 60 × 8 M16 3000 19.2 24.8
200 200 75 25 25 45 20 130–180 300–400 80 × 10 M20 3000 40.2 48.0
200 200 100 25 25 45 20 130–180 300–400 80 × 10 M20 3000 36.2 48.0
250 250 100 30 30 50 25 140–200 350–450 100 × 10 M24 2000 60.2 75.0
300 300 125 30 30 60 30 140–200 350–450 110 × 12 M24 3700 92.1 108

* Dimension only applies to CF-A fender. [ Units: mm, kg/m ]

CF-C series CF-D series

Flat Bolt Std Weight


A B øC* a b c t øD E F G H bar size Length CF-C CF-D
80 80 42 60 40 44 10 15 25 6 90–130 200–300 45 × 6 M12 2000 5.4 7.0
100 100 45 74 50 56 10 15 25 8 90–130 200–300 45 × 6 M12 2000 8.4 11.0
120 120 62 88 60 67 12 20 30 10 110–150 250–350 60 × 8 M16 2000 12.2 15.8
150 150 73 110 75 83 15 20 30 12 110–150 250–350 60 × 8 M16 3000 19.7 24.8
* Dimension only applies to CF-C fender. [ Units: mm, kg/m ]

B B G H H
E t F E t F

øD øD

øC a A øC A

b
c
UHMW-PE face (black as standard)

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S07-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


7–8

EXTRUDED
FENDERS
Square and D-section extruded
profiles are widely used as beltings
on tugs and other workboats.
DC and SC fenders have a circular
bore for extra wall thickness and
durability. DD and SD fenders have a
D-bore for securing with a flat bar.
Extruded fenders are available in
many other sections as well. All can DC-fenders
be cut to length, drilled, angle cut or
pre-curved as required. Flat Bolt
A B øC øD E F G H Weight
bar size
100 100 30 15 25 10 90–130 200–300 50 × 6 M12 10.1
150 150 65 20 30 12 110–150 250–350 60 × 8 M16 20.6
200 200 75 25 45 15 130–180 300–400 80 × 10 M20 38.5
250 250 100 30 50 20 140–200 350–450 100 × 10 M24 59.0
300 300 125 30 60 25 140–200 350–450 110 × 12 M24 83.7
350 350 150 35 70 25 140–200 350–450 120 × 12 M30 113
400 400 175 35 80 30 140–200 350–450 130 × 15 M30 146
400 400 200 35 80 30 140–200 350–450 130 × 15 M30 137
500 500 250 35 100 30 140–200 350–450 130 × 15 M36 214
Fender E R E R [ Units: mm, kg/m ]
size (kNm) (kN) (kNm) (kN)
SC-fenders
100 1.9 157 2.7 173
150 4.2 235 6.4 259 Flat Bolt
A B øC øD E F G H Weight
bar size
200 7.5 314 11.3 345 100 100 30 15 25 10 90–130 200–300 50 × 6 M12 11.4
250 11.7 392 17.7 431 150 150 65 20 30 12 110–150 250–350 60 × 8 M16 23.6
165 125 65 20 30 15 110–150 250–350 60 × 8 M16 21.3
300 16.9 471 25.5 518
200 200 75 25 45 15 130–180 300–400 80 × 10 M20 43.8
350 22.9 549 34.3 604 200 200 100 25 40 15 130–180 300–400 80 × 10 M20 39.5
400 29.4 628 45.1 690 250 200 80 30 45 20 140–200 350–450 90 × 10 M24 55.3
250 250 100 30 50 20 140–200 350–450 100 × 10 M24 67.2
500 46.0 785 70.5 863
300 250 100 30 50 25 140–200 350–450 100 × 10 M24 82.6
Values are per metre. 300 300 125 30 60 25 140–200 350–450 110 × 12 M24 95.6
350 350 150 35 65 25 140–200 350–450 120 × 12 M30 126
350 350 175 35 65 25 140–200 350–450 120 × 12 M30 121
120 400 400 200 35 70 30 140–200 350–450 130 × 15 M30 158
500 500 250 45 90 40 150–230 400–500 150 × 20 M36 247
Rated Reaction
100
Reaction (% of Rated)

[ Units: mm, kg/m ]


Energy (% of Rated)

80
B G H H
60 120 E F
tion
ac 100
40 Re 80
øD
y 60
20 rg
E ne 40
20 øC A
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50

Deflection (%)

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S07-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


7–9

EXTRUDED FENDERS

DD-series

A B C D øE øF G H Flat bar Bolt size Weight


80 70 45 30 30 15 90–130 200–300 35 × 5 M12 4.8
100 100 50 45 30 15 90–130 200–300 40 × 5 M12 8.5
125 125 60 60 40 20 110–150 250–300 50 × 6 M16 13.2
150 150 75 75 40 20 110–150 250–300 60 × 8 M16 18.5
200 150 100 80 50 25 130–180 300–400 80 × 10 M20 23.1
200 200 100 100 50 25 130–180 300–400 80 × 10 M20 32.9
250 200 125 100 60 30 140–200 350–450 90 × 12 M24 39.9
250 250 125 125 60 30 140–200 350–450 90 × 12 M24 51.5
300 300 150 150 60 30 140–200 350–450 110 × 12 M24 74.1
350 350 175 175 75 35 140–200 350–450 130 × 15 M30 101
380 380 190 190 75 35 140–200 350–450 140 × 15 M30 119
400 300 175 150 75 35 140–200 350–450 130 × 15 M30 99
Fender E R E R 400 400 200 200 75 35 140–200 350–450 150 × 15 M30 132
size (kNm) (kN) (kNm) (kN) 500 500 250 250 90 45 160–230 400–500 180 × 20 M36 206
100 1.4 77 2.7 136 [ Units: mm, kg/m ]
150 3.2 115 6.4 206 SD-series
200 5.7 153 11.3 275
A B C D øE øF G H Flat bar Bolt size Weight
250 8.9 191 17.6 343 100 100 50 45 30 15 90–130 200–300 40 × 5 M12 9.9
300 12.9 230 25.5 412 150 150 70 65 40 20 110–150 250–300 50 × 8 M16 22.7
350 17.6 268 34.3 471 165 125 80 60 40 20 110–150 250–300 60 × 8 M16 20.3
200 150 90 65 50 25 130–180 300–400 70 × 10 M20 30.8
400 23.0 306 45.2 589
200 200 90 95 50 25 130–180 300–400 70 × 10 M20 39.8
500 35.9 383 70.7 736 250 200 120 95 60 30 140–200 350–450 90 × 12 M24 49.4
Values are per metre. 250 250 120 120 60 30 140–200 350–450 90 × 12 M24 61.1
300 250 140 115 60 30 140–200 350–450 100 × 12 M24 75.0
300 300 125 135 60 30 140–200 350–450 100 × 12 M24 92.0
400 400 200 200 75 35 140–200 350–450 150 × 15 M30 153
120
500 500 250 250 90 45 160–230 400–500 180 × 20 M36 239
Rated Reaction
100
Reaction (% of Rated)

[ Units: mm, kg/m ]


Energy (% of Rated)

80
B G H H
60 n 120
tio 100
D 25
ac
40 Re 80
y 60
20 erg 40
En
20 F øE C A
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50

Deflection (%)

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S07-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


7–10

CHAINS & ACCESSORIES


Open Link Chains

øC 3.0D links 3.5D links 4.0D links 5.0D links MBL


L W Weight L W Weight L W Weight L W Weight SL2 SL3
14 42 18 0.2 49 20 0.2 56 20 0.2 70 21 0.3 124 154
16 48 21 0.3 56 22 0.3 64 22 0.3 80 24 0.4 160 202
18 54 23 0.4 63 25 0.4 72 25 0.5 90 27 0.5 209 262
20 60 26 0.5 70 28 0.6 80 28 0.6 100 30 0.8 264 330
22 66 29 0.7 77 31 0.8 88 31 0.8 110 33 1.0 304 380
25 75 33 1.1 88 35 1.1 100 35 1.2 125 38 1.5 393 491
28 84 36 1.4 98 39 1.6 112 39 1.7 140 42 2.0 492 616
30 90 39 1.8 105 42 2.0 120 42 2.1 150 45 2.5 566 706
32 96 42 2.2 112 45 2.4 128 45 2.5 160 48 3.0 644 804
35 105 46 2.8 123 49 3.1 140 49 3.3 175 53 4.0 770 964
38 114 49 3.6 133 53 3.9 152 53 4.3 190 57 5.1 900 1130
40 120 52 4.2 140 56 4.6 160 56 5.0 200 60 6.0 1010 1260
45 135 59 6.0 158 63 6.5 180 63 7.1 225 68 8.5 1275 1590
50 150 65 8.2 175 70 8.9 200 70 9.7 250 75 11.6 1570 1960
55 165 72 10.9 193 77 11.9 220 77 12.9 275 83 15.5 1900 2380
60 180 78 14.2 210 84 15.4 240 84 16.8 300 90 20.1 2260 2770
[ Units: mm, kg/link, kN ]
L
W

øC

High Strength Shackles

Dee shackle Bow shackle


ØD ØF ØH G NBL
E Weight E ØJ Weight
13 16 26 22 43 0.4 51 32 0.4 120
16 19 32 27 51 0.7 64 43 0.8 195
19 22 38 31 59 1.1 76 51 1.3 285
22 25 44 36 73 1.5 83 58 1.9 390
25 28 50 43 85 2.6 95 68 2.8 510
28 32 56 47 90 3.3 108 75 3.8 570
32 35 64 51 94 4.7 115 83 5.3 720
35 38 70 57 115 6.2 133 95 7.0 810
38 42 76 60 127 7.6 146 99 8.8 1020
45 50 90 74 149 12.8 178 126 15.0 1500
50 57 100 83 171 18.2 197 138 20.7 2100
57 65 114 95 190 27.8 222 160 29.3 2550
65 70 130 105 203 35.1 254 180 41.0 3330
75 80 150 127 230 60.0 330 190 64.5 5100
89 95 178 146 267 93.0 381 238 110 7200
102 108 204 165 400 145 400 275 160 9000
[ Units: mm, kg, kN ]
Dee Bow
ØD ØD

ØJ MBL = Minimum Breaking Load (kN)


E E
NBL = Nominal Breaking Load (kN)
ØH ØH Tolerance: all dimensions ±2%
Safety pin G ØF G ØF

M1100-S07-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


7–11

Proven
in practice

© Graeme Ewens

M1100-S07-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


7–12

PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
For assistance with design or pricing of tug fenders, please complete this form and fax or email it to your local Trelleborg
Marine Systems office, together with legible drawings if possible.

PROJECT DETAILS PROJECT STATUS

Operating Port/Region TMS Ref:

Owner/Operator Design
Naval Architect Under Construction
Shipyard Refit

VESSEL Name or Yard Number: ________________________________________________

Overall length _________________ m Length at waterline _____________ m Beam (moulded) _______________m

Draft (max) ___________________ m Displacement __________________ t Bollard pull (BP) _________________t

Pushing hull pressure ________ t/m2 Operating angle (α) ________ degrees Flare angle (β) ___________ degrees

Operating Angle
β

CYLINDRICAL FENDER

Bow Stern

Inside diameter _______________mm Outside diameter ______________mm

Length _______________________ m Joints allowed: yes no Tapered ends: yes no

Longitudinal chain: yes no Size _____________________mm

Circumferential fixings: chain web not required

M1100-S07-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


7–13

PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

PUSHING FENDERS

Bow Stern

M-Type
BOW

W-Type

Keyhole
STERN

Section Size (mm)

SIDE BELTINGS

(tick required section)

Section size __________________mm Approx. length _________________ m (total port and starboard)

Joints allowed: yes no Plugged joints: yes no

Transition Blocks: Bow: yes no Stern: yes no

DRAWINGS Full drawings available yes no

ENVIRONMENT QUALITY SAFETY

Highest quality Maximum safety


Operating temperature Corrosivity

Minimum ________ (°C) low medium


Maximum _______ (°C) high extreme
Lowest price Not safety-critical

FURTHER DETAILS AVAILABLE FROM

Name Tel

Company Fax

Position Mobile

Address Email

Web

M1100-S07-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


Safety Products

Section 8

Trelleborg Marine Systems

Safety Ladders
www.trelleborg.com/marine
Ref. M1100-S08-V1.2-EN
8–2

ML MODULAR
LADDERS
Modular ladders are flexible, corrosion resistant and can
withstand most accidental impacts from smaller vessels.
The step modules are made from polyurethane and can
be linked together, combined with extensions and a
variety of optional handrails to suit many applications.

240 647
With PU ladder
extensions

300

Safety ladder
step M20
anchors
Examples of optional handrails
Safety ladder
extension
connection part

Safety ladder
extension

Steel weight

With steel 240 647


extensions

300

Can also be
supplied with
chain
extension

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S08-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


8–3

LF-250
LADDERS
The LF-250 integrates the functions
of a ladder and a fender into a single
unit. They are very robust but remain
flexible to reduce accident damage
and help protect the wharf when
small craft berth. Available in a range
of lengths, the LF-250 Ladder Fender
can also be fitted with a rubber
encased chain extension to suit
overhanging structures.

645
600

250 340
300
100
Dimensions
600 typ.
A Rungs Anchors Weight

1100 4 2×3 69
A
1400 5 2×3 88 Rubber
ladder
1700 6 2×4 107 fender
300 typ. M20
2000 7 2×4 125 anchors

2300 8 2×5 145


ø50
2600 9 2×5 164 flexible
rungs
2900 10 2×6 183

[ Units: mm, kg] 1500 Chain


ladder
extension

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S08-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


Accessories

Section 9

Trelleborg Marine Systems


Fender Panels
Chains
Shackles
Brackets
www.trelleborg.com/marine NC3 Anchors
EC2 Anchors
Ref. M1100-S09-V1.2-EN Fixing Bolts
9–2

FENDER
PANELS
Fender panels are just as important
as the rubber units on high
performance systems. That’s why
every panel is purpose designed
using structural analysis programs
and 3D CAD modelling for optimum
strength.
Fender panels distribute reaction
forces to provide low hull pressures
and cope with large tidal variations.
They can also be designed to resist
line loads from belted ships, or
even point loads in special cases.
Optional lead-in bevels reduce the
snagging risk, whilst brackets (where
required) provide highly secure
connection points for chains.
Closed box designs are used
almost exclusively – all fully sealed Specification and design
and pressure checked. Corrosion of panels
protection is provided by high
durability C5M class paint systems Panel specifications and
to ISO 12944, and additional designs should consider:
corrosion allowances can be
designed in where required. B Hull pressures and tidal range
B Lead-in bevels and chamfers
B Bending moment and shear
Features and options B Local buckling
B Closed box steel structure B Limit state load factors
B Internal structural members B Steel grade
B Blind boss fender connections B Permissible stresses
B Pressure tested for watertightness B Weld sizes and types
B C5M modified epoxy paint* B Pressure test method
B Polyurethane topcoat † B Rubber fender connections
(RAL5005 blue) B UHMW-PE attachment
B Studs for UHMW-PE face pads B Chain connections
B Chain brackets B Lifting points
B Lifting points B Paint systems
B Lead-in bevels and chamfers B Corrosion allowance
B Maintenance and service life
* Other options available
† Alternative colours on request

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S09-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


9–3

FENDER PANELS
10

1 Closed box steel structure


9
7
2 Internal structural members

8 3 Blind boss fender connections

4 Shot blasted steel (SA2.5)

5 C5M modified epoxy paint*


3
1
6 Polyurethane topcoat
(RAL5005 blue)†

7 Studs for UHMW-PE face pads


8
8 Chain brackets

9 Lifting points

2 10 Lead-in bevels and chamfers*


6
5
4
* Options available

Alternative colours on request

Steel Properties PIANC steel thicknesses

Yield Strength (min) Tensile Strength (min) Temperature Exposed both faces ≥ 12mm
Standard Grade
N/mm² psi N/mm² psi °C °F
Exposed one face ≥ 9mm
S235JR 235 34 000 360 52 000 – – Internal (not exposed) ≥ 8mm
(1.0038)
S275JR 275 40 000 420 61 000 – – Corresponding minimum panel thickness
(1.0044)
EN 10025 will be 140–160mm (excluding UHMW-PE
S355J2 355 51 000 510 74 000 -20 -4
(1.0570) face pads) and often much greater.
S355J0 355 51 000 510 74 000 0 32
(1.0553)
SS41 235 34 000 402 58 000 0 32 Typical panel weights
JIS G-3101 SS50 275 40 000 402 58 000 0 32
Light duty 200–250kg/m2
SM50 314 46 000 490 71 000 0 32
Medium duty 250–300kg/m2
A-36 250 36 000 400 58 000 0 32 Heavy duty 300–400kg/m2
ASTM
A-572 345 50 000 450 65 000 0 32 Extreme duty ≥400kg/m2

The national standards of France and Germany have been replaced by EN 10025. In the
UK, BS4360 has been replaced by BS EN 10025. The table above is for guidance only
and is not comprehensive. Actual specifications should be consulted in all cases for the
full specifications of steel grades listed and other similar grades.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S09-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


9–4

CHAINS AND
ACCESSORIES
Some fender systems need chains to
help support heavy components or to
control how the fender deflects and
shears during impact. Open link or
stud link chains are commonly used
and these can be supplied in several
different strength grades.
Compatible accessories like
shackles, brackets and U-anchors
are also available. The nominal
breaking load (NBL) of these items
is matched to chains of similar
capacity. Chains and accessories
are supplied galvanised as standard.
Chain brackets may also be supplied
in an optional painted finish.
Typical chain system

Features
B Choice of open or stud link chain
B Various link lengths available
B Proof load tested and certified
B Galvanised as standard
B Variety of matched accessories
1
1 Anchor bolts
2
Applications 2 Chain bracket (S-series)
B Large fender panels
B Cylindrical fenders 3 3 Alloy D-shackle
B Floating fender moorings
B Safety applications 4 4 Chain adjuster
B Lifting and installing
5 Open link chain

6 Chain bracket (T-series)


5

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S09-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


9–5

OPEN LINK CHAINS


Open Link Chains

øC 3.0D links 3.5D links 4.0D links 5.0D links MBL


L W Weight L W Weight L W Weight L W Weight SL2 SL3
14 42 18 0.2 49 20 0.2 56 20 0.2 70 21 0.3 124 154
16 48 21 0.3 56 22 0.3 64 22 0.3 80 24 0.4 160 202
18 54 23 0.4 63 25 0.4 72 25 0.5 90 27 0.5 209 262
20 60 26 0.5 70 28 0.6 80 28 0.6 100 30 0.8 264 330
22 66 29 0.7 77 31 0.8 88 31 0.8 110 33 1.0 304 380
25 75 33 1.1 88 35 1.1 100 35 1.2 125 38 1.5 393 491
28 84 36 1.4 98 39 1.6 112 39 1.7 140 42 2.0 492 616
30 90 39 1.8 105 42 2.0 120 42 2.1 150 45 2.5 566 706
32 96 42 2.2 112 45 2.4 128 45 2.5 160 48 3.0 644 804
35 105 46 2.8 123 49 3.1 140 49 3.3 175 53 4.0 770 964
38 114 49 3.6 133 53 3.9 152 53 4.3 190 57 5.1 900 1130
40 120 52 4.2 140 56 4.6 160 56 5.0 200 60 6.0 1010 1260
45 135 59 6.0 158 63 6.5 180 63 7.1 225 68 8.5 1275 1590
50 150 65 8.2 175 70 8.9 200 70 9.7 250 75 11.6 1570 1960
55 165 72 10.9 193 77 11.9 220 77 12.9 275 83 15.5 1900 2380
60 180 78 14.2 210 84 15.4 240 84 16.8 300 90 20.1 2260 2770
[ Units: mm, kg/link, kN ]
L
W
MBL = Minimum Breaking Load (kN)
NBL = Nominal Breaking Load (kN)
Tolerance: all dimensions ±2%
øC

Stud Link Chains Chain Tensioners

Common link MBL Chain size øA L W Weight


øC L W Weight SL2 (U2) SL3 (U3) 16 M16 200–240 40 2.7
19 76 68 0.6 210 300 18 M18 220–280 45 3.5
22 88 79 0.9 280 401
20 M20 235–305 50 5.3
26 104 94 1.5 389 556
22 M22 265–345 56 6.6
28 112 101 1.9 449 642
32 128 115 2.8 583 833 22 M24 280–370 60 8.8
34 136 122 3.4 655 937 25 M27 310–420 68 12
38 152 137 4.7 812 1160 30 M30 345–465 76 17
42 168 151 6.3 981 1400 32 M33 385–525 82 21
44 176 158 7.3 1080 1540 35 M36 420–560 90 27
48 192 173 9.4 1270 1810 40 M42 480–650 106 45
52 208 187 12.0 1480 2110
45 M48 545–745 120 64
58 232 209 16.7 1810 2600
50 M52 595–805 130 80
64 256 230 22.3 2190 3130
70 280 252 29.5 2580 3690 55 M56 640–880 140 99
76 304 274 37.9 3010 4300 60 M60 685–945 150 122
90 360 324 63.4 4090 5840 60 M64 730–1010 160 147
[ Units: mm, kg/link, kN ] [ Units: mm, kg, kN ]
L
L

W W

øC øA

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S09-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


9–6

HIGH STRENGTH SHACKLES


Dee shackle Bow shackle
ØD ØF ØH G NBL
E Weight E ØJ Weight
13 16 26 22 43 0.4 51 32 0.4 120
16 19 32 27 51 0.7 64 43 0.8 195
19 22 38 31 59 1.1 76 51 1.3 285
22 25 44 36 73 1.5 83 58 1.9 390
25 28 50 43 85 2.6 95 68 2.8 510
28 32 56 47 90 3.3 108 75 3.8 570
32 35 64 51 94 4.7 115 83 5.3 720
35 38 70 57 115 6.2 133 95 7.0 810
38 42 76 60 127 7.6 146 99 8.8 1020
45 50 90 74 149 12.8 178 126 15.0 1500
50 57 100 83 171 18.2 197 138 20.7 2100
57 65 114 95 190 27.8 222 160 29.3 2550
65 70 130 105 203 35.1 254 180 41.0 3330
75 80 150 127 230 60.0 330 190 64.5 5100
89 95 178 146 267 93.0 381 238 110 7200
102 108 204 165 400 145 400 275 160 9000

[ Units: mm, kg, kN ]

Dee ØD Bow ØD

ØJ
E E

ØH ØH

Safety pin G ØF G ØF

U-ANCHORS
øD E F G J K t Weight NBL
26 260 60 320 104 50 12 3.4 209
30 300 70 370 120 50 15 5.1 264
G
34 340 70 410 136 60 15 7.3 304
t E F
36 360 70 430 144 60 20 8.6 393
42 420 90 510 168 70 20 13.7 492
44 440 100 540 176 80 20 16.1 566 ØD
48 480 100 580 192 80 25 20.5 644 J
50 500 110 610 200 90 25 23.7 770 K
56 560 120 680 224 100 30 33.4 900
60 600 130 730 240 110 30 41.1 1010
66 660 140 800 264 120 35 54.8 1275
74 740 160 900 296 130 40 76.9 1570

[ Units: mm, kg, kN ]

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S09-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


9–7

BRACKETS
C E Single Lug Twin Lug
A B CB1 CB2/ CB1/ CB2 F Ød R t T Shackle Shackle Anchor
ØD ØD
CB3 CB3 Body Pin Bolt pin
190 130 30 40 30 65 160 24 40 15 30 19 22 28 M24 × 100 28 2/4 × M20
220 150 35 45 30 75 190 24 50 15 30 22 25 28 M24 × 100 28 2/4 × M20
250 170 40 50 35 85 210 28 55 20 40 25 28 36 M30 × 120 36 2/4 × M24
280 190 45 60 40 95 240 28 65 20 40 28 32 36 M30 × 120 36 2/4 × M24
320 220 50 65 50 110 270 36 75 25 45 32 35 42 M36 × 150 42 2/4 × M30
350 240 55 70 50 120 300 36 80 25 50 35 38 42 M36 × 150 42 2/4 × M30
380 260 60 80 55 130 320 42 85 30 50 38 42 50 M42 × 170 50 2/4 × M36
420 290 65 85 60 145 360 42 95 30 60 42 28 50 M42 × 170 50 2/4 × M36
440 300 70 90 60 150 380 50 100 30 60 45 50 60 M48 × 190 60 2/4 × M42

Standard steel grade: S235/S275. Finish: Galvanised (85μm). [ Units: mm, kN ]

S-Series
A A A
B B B

A B T A B T A B T

Ød Ød Ød

T-Series

A A A
B B B

t t t
A B T A B T A B T
t t t

F
F 90±45° 0–
°
ØD ØD 90 F
90
0–

0–

ØD
4 5°

R R R
E C E C C
t t t
CB1 CB2 CB3

B All chain and accessory information is for guidance only. B Chain brackets can be specified with 2 or 4 anchors to
B Every chain design should be checked to confirm suit application and loads.
suitability for the intended application. B If extra long life is required, add a corrosion allowance.
B Select chain system components so MBL ≈ NBL. B Some slack in the chain is unavoidable and will not
B Every chain system is different. Check all dimensions affect operation.
for fit, clearance and tolerance. B For special sizes and applications, please refer to
Trelleborg Marine Systems office.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S09-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


9–8

FENDER FIXINGS
NC3 anchors Thread A B C ØD E ØF L S (sq) T Weight
M20 40 20 60 20 160 30 200 63 10 1.1
M22 44 22 66 22 181 32 225 63 10 1.4
The NC3 is a traditional cast-in
M24 48 25 73 24 202 36 250 75 10 1.9
anchor design used for installing M27 54 30 84 27 211 40 265 75 10 2.4
fenders to new concrete. The NC3 M30 60 35 95 30 210 45 270 100 10 3.5
anchor has a threaded socket, a M36 72 40 112 36 248 54 320 100 12 5.5
long tail and a square anchor plate. M42 84 50 134 42 276 63 360 100 12 8.1
Non-standard sizes and other cast- M48 96 60 156 48 304 72 400 100 15 11.5
in anchor types are available on M56 112 70 182 56 438 84 550 120 15 19.5
request. M64 128 80 208 64 472 100 600 130 20 29.8
M76 152 90 242 76 548 114 700 150 20 46.1
Standard anchors are available in Grade 8.8/galvanised [ Units: mm ]
or 100% Stainless Steel 316 (1.4401).
Larger sizes and special dimensions available on request.

L
Always check
A E
min/max clamping
thickness and B T
socket depths actual C V W T
threaded length on W
bolts.
ØF M ØD S (sq)

EC2 anchors Thread B E G J L (typ.) øS Capsule


M12 110 5–8 10 2.5 – 15 1 × C12
The EC2 anchor is used for installing M16 140 6–9 13 3 175 20 1 × C16
fenders onto existing concrete M20 170 6–9 16 3 240 25 1 × C20
or where cast-in anchors are M24 210 8–12 19 4 270 28 1 × C24
unsuitable. The anchor is usually M30 280 8–12 24 4 360 35 1 × C30
secured into a drilled hole using M36 330 10–15 29 5 420 40 1 × C30
special grout capsules. Non-standard M42 420 14–21 34 7 500 50 2 × C30
sizes and other grout systems are M48 480 16–24 38 8 580 54 2 × C30 + 1 × C24
available on request. M56 560 18–27 45 9 – 64 4 × C30
A = E + G + H + J, rounded up to nearest 10mm. [ Units: mm ]
E = clear threads after assembly.
H = clamping thickness of fender or bracket.

L
A B

Always follow the


G J
manufacturer’s
instructions when øS
installing EC2
anchors. M12–M56
Grout Capsule
H

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S09-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


9–9

FENDER FIXINGS
Thread area* Washers† Nuts Typical thread lengths‡ Thread
Size
(mm2) OD ID t AF T L ≤ 125 L > 125 pitch
M16 157 30 18 3 24 13 38 44 2.0
M20 245 37 22 3 30 16 46 52 2.5
M24 353 44 26 4 36 19 54 60 3.0
M30 561 56 33 4 46 24 66 72 3.5
M36 817 66 39 5 55 29 78 84 4.0
M42 1120 78 45 7 65 34 90 96 4.5
M48 1470 92 52 8 75 38 102 108 5.0
M56 2030 105 62 9 85 45 118 124 5.5
M64 2680 115 70 9 95 51 134 140 6.0
* According to BS 3692: Table 13. [ Units: mm ]
† Standard washers given. Large OD washers available on request.
‡ Thread lengths may vary depending on standard. Other lengths available.

LT
ID
ØB L OD t S T

Grades

ISO 898 Galvanised ISO 356 Stainless Steel*


Fenders must be properly fixed
Bolt grade 4.6 8.8 A-50† A-70‡
to operate correctly. Anchors
Nut grade 4 8 A-50† A-70‡ are supplied to suit new or
existing structures, in various
Tensile strength (MPa) 400 800 500 700
strength ratings and with the
0.2% yield stress (MPa) 240 640 210 450 choice of galvanised or various
* Refer to p12–31 for further details about PREN and galling. stainless steels.
† Size ≤ M39 unless agreed with manufacturer.

‡ Size ≤ M24 unless agreed with manufacturer.

Standard manufacturing and performance tolerances apply (see pages 12–36 to 12–39)

M1100-S09-V1.2-EN. © Trelleborg AB, 2008


Bollards

Section 10

Trelleborg Marine Systems

Tee
Horn
www.trelleborg.com/marine Kidney

Ref. M1100-S10-V1.2-EN
10–2

BOLLARDS
Trelleborg bollards come in many
popular shapes and sizes to suit
most docks, jetties and wharves.
Standard material is spheroidal
graphite (commonly called
SG or ductile iron) which is both
strong and resistant to corrosion,
meaning Trelleborg bollards enjoy a
long and trouble free service life.
The shape of Trelleborg bollards
has been refined with finite element
techniques to optimize the geometry
and anchor layout. Even at full
working load, Trelleborg bollards
remain highly stable and provide a
safe and secure mooring.

Features Tee Horn Kidney


B High quality SG iron as standard
B Strong and durable designs
B Very low maintenance
B Large line angles possible
B Standard and custom anchors
available

M1100-S10-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


10–3

TEE BOLLARDS

recommended
line angle

Features
B General purpose applications up to 200 tonnes
B Suitable for steeper rope angles

180º

seaward side Bollard capacity (tonnes)


Dimension
15 30 50 80 100 150 200
D
A 40 40 50 70 80 90 90
G G
B 235 255 350 380 410 435 500
C 340 350 500 550 600 700 800
D 410 450 640 640 790 900 1000
F
cL E 335 375 540 550 640 750 850
L1° E
F 80 100 150 160 175 200 225

G L2° G 155 175 250 250 325 350 375


ØI 160 200 260 280 350 400 450
J 205 225 320 320 395 450 500
L3°
cL K 130 150 220 230 245 300 350
L1º 30º 30º 30º 15º 10º 10º 0º
L2º – – – 45º 40º 40º 36º
C
L3º 60º 60º 60º N/A 80º 80º 72º
Bolts M24 M30 M36 M42 M42 M48 M56
B
Bolt length 500 500 500 800 800 1000 1000
ØI
P* 55 55 65 85 95 105 105
A
Qty 5 5 5 6 7 7 8
J K *P = bolt protrusion = recess depth [ Units: mm ]

M1100-S10-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


10–4

HORN BOLLARDS

recommended
line angle

Features
B General purpose applications up to 200 tonnes
180º
B Suitable for steep rope angles
B Two lines may share a single bollard
(subject to bollard capacity)

seaward side
Bollard capacity (tonnes)
D Dimension
15 30 50 80 100 150 200
G G
A 40 40 50 70 80 90 90
B 370 410 500 520 570 585 660

F C 400 440 600 660 750 850 930


cL D 410 480 640 650 800 920 1000
L1° E
E 335 405 540 560 650 770 850
G L2° F 80 100 150 160 175 200 225
G 155 175 250 250 325 350 375
L4° ØI 160 200 260 300 350 400 450
cL L3° J 205 240 320 325 400 460 500
K 130 165 220 235 250 310 350
L1º 30º 30º 30º 15º 10º 10º 0º
C
L2º – – – 45º 40º 40º 36º
L3º 60º 60º 60º N/A 80º 80º –
L4º – – – – – – 36º
B
Bolts M24 M30 M36 M42 M42 M48 M56
ØI Bolt length 500 500 500 800 800 1000 1000
P* 55 55 65 85 95 105 105
A
Qty 5 5 5 6 7 7 8
J K *P = bolt protrusion = recess depth [ Units: mm ]

M1100-S10-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


10–5

KIDNEY BOLLARDS

recommended
line angle

Features
B General purpose applications up to 200 tonnes
B Avoid steep rope angles where possible 180º
B Suitable for warping operations

Bollard capacity (tonnes)


Dimension
15 30 50 80 100 150 200
seaward side
A 40 40 50 70 70 80 90
D
H B 260 280 320 330 350 405 435
C 340 370 480 530 550 728 800
D 320 360 540 560 590 760 1000
F E 320 360 540 460 490 660 850
L E F – – – – 175 250 300

G G – – – – 175 250 300


F+G 220 260 400 320 350 500 600
H 220 260 400 420 450 600 750
ØI 160 200 260 280 300 400 450
C J 160 180 270 280 295 380 475
K 160 180 270 180 195 280 375
L – – – 50 50 50 50

B Bolts M24 M30 M36 M42 M42 M48 M56


ØI Bolt length 500 500 500 800 800 1000 1000
P* 55 55 65 85 85 95 105
A
Qty 4 4 4 5 7 7 7
J K *P = bolt protrusion = recess depth [ Units: mm ]

M1100-S10-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


10–6

BOLLARD SELECTION
Design Material specifications
Bollards and holding down bolts are designed with a Trelleborg bollards are produced to the highest
minimum Factor of Safety against failure of 3.0 for specifications. The table gives indicative standards and
SG Iron material grade 65-45-12. grades but many other options are available on request.
Designs are typically based on the following:
Material Standards* Grade(s)*
BS 5950: 2000 Structural Use of Steelwork Ductile Cast Iron BS EN 1563 EN-GJS-450 or 500
BS 6349 Part 2: 1988 Marine Structures (Spheroidal Graphite Iron) ASTM A 536 65-45-12 or 80-55-6
AS 3990: 1993 Mechanical Equipment Design
Anchor bolts (galvanised) ISO 898 Gr 8.8 (galvanised)
BS 3692 Gr 8.8 (galvanised)
Detailed calculations can be supplied on request. ASTM A325 (galvanised)
Different factors of safety can be used to suit other
national standards and regulations. Blasting (standard) N/A Sweep blast
Blasting (high ISO 12944 SA2.5
performance)†

Paint (standard) BS3416 Black bitumen (1 coat)


Materials Paint (high performance)† ISO 12944 Class C5M

Trelleborg bollards are offered in Spheroidal Graphite Cast * In all cases equivalent alternative standards may apply.
Iron (SG Iron), referred to as Ductile Cast Iron, because of †
Other high performance paint systems available on request.
its superior strength and resistance to corrosion. Ductile
cast iron combines the best attributes of grey cast iron
and cast steel without the disadvantages.
Protective coatings
Benefits Disadvantages
Lowest service life cost Installation and grout filling requires extra care to avoid
Ductile
Cast Iron High strength damage to factory applied coatings. Bollards are supplied
(Spheroidal Good impact resistance
Graphite) as factory standard with a bituminous protective coating
High corrosion resistance suitable for most projects. High performance epoxy or
Low cost per weight Low strength
Grey Cast other specified paint systems can be factory applied on
Excellent corrosion Low impact
Iron request in a choice of colours and thicknesses.
resistance resistance
High strength Regular maintenance
Cast Steel High impact resistance to prevent corrosion
Good cost per weight

Ductile cast iron is the preferred material for all bollard


applications. Grey cast iron is cheaper per unit weight,
but the need for thicker wall sections and poor impact
strength outweigh this. Cast steel remains popular in some
countries but needs regular painting to prevent corrosion.

Micro structure

Wear and abrasion from ropes means paint coatings need


Ductile cast iron (SG) Grey iron regular maintenance. Ductile iron bollards are far less
susceptible to corrosion than cast steel bollards, which
can rust quickly and will need frequent painting to retain
full strength.

M1100-S10-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


10–7

BOLLARD SELECTION
Bollards should be selected and arranged according to Displacement Approx. bollard rating
local regulations or recognised design standards. The Up to 2,000 tonnes 10 tonnes
design process should consider:
2,000 – 10,000 tonnes 30 tonnes

B Mooring pattern(s) 10,000 – 20,000 tonnes 60 tonnes


B Changes in draft due to loading and discharge 20,000 – 50,000 tonnes 80 tonnes
B Wind and current forces
50,000 – 100,000 tonnes 100 tonnes
B Swell, wave and tidal forces
B Mooring line types, sizes and angles 100,000 – 200,000 tonnes 150 tonnes
B Ice forces (where relevant)
over 200,000 tonnes 200 tonnes

Mooring loads should be calculated where possible, but


in the absence of information then the following table can Where strong winds, currents or other adverse loads are
be used as an approximate guideline. expected, bollard capacity should be increased by 25% or more.

Mooring line angles

Bollards Forward breast


After breast line
Spring
line lines

Stern line Head line

Mooring line angles are normally calculated as part of Fully laden case
a comprehensive mooring simulation. Standards and α
guidelines such as BS6349 : Part 4, ROM 0.2-90 and Low tide
Fmin Mean tide
PIANC suggest mooring line angles are kept within the High tide
limits given in the table below. In some cases much larger
line angles can be expected.
Trelleborg bollards can cope with horizontal angles of
±90° and vertical angles up to 75°. Please check with
your local office about applications where expected line
angles exceed those given in the table as these may need
additional design checks on anchorages and concrete
stresses. Light draught case
α
Suggested Line Angles
(BS6349, ROM 0.2-90, PIANC) Fmax Low tide
Mean tide
High tide
Head & stern lines* 45° ±15°
Breast lines* 90° ±30°
Spring lines* 5–10°
Vertical line angle (α) <30°
* Relative to mooring angle

M1100-S10-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


10–8

INSTALLATION
Quality assurance
Bollards are safety critical items and quality is paramount.
A typical quality documentation package will include:

B Dimensioned drawings of bollard and accessories


B Bollard and anchorage calculations (if required)
B Factory inspection report
B Physical properties report for casting
B Installation instructions

Bollards must be installed correctly for a long and trouble-


free service life. Anchors should be accurately set out
with the supplied template. Bollards can be recessed (as Codes and guidelines
shown) or alternatively surface mounted. Once the grout
has reached full strength, anchors can be fully tightened. ROM 0.2-90 (1990)
Actions in the Design of Maritime and Harbor Works
Mastic is often applied around exposed threads to ease
future removal. BS6349: Part 4 (1994)
Code of Practice for Design of Fendering and Mooring
Systems
PIANC Report of WG24 (1995)
Concrete recess Criteria for Movements of Moored Ships in Harbours –
A Practical Guide (1995)
bollard
grout EAU (1996)
Recommendations of the Committee for Waterfront
P Structures

P PIANC Report of PTC II-30 (1997)


Approach Channels: A Guide for Design (Appendix B –
D+30 Typical Ship Dimensions)
E+30 Ministry of Transport, Japan (1999)
Technical Note No.911 – Ship Dimensions of Design Ships
under given Confidence Limits
ROSA – Defenses D’accostage (2000)
* refer to dimensions tables Recommandations pour Le Calcul Aux Etats-Limitesdes
Ouvrages En Site Aquatique defenses D’accostage

Recessing the bollard is generally recognised as superior PIANC Report of WG33 (2002)
Guidelines for the Design of Fender Systems (2002)
to surface mounting. Recessing the base prevents the
bollard from working loose on its bolts or cracking the
grout bed – especially relevant for high use locations.

Fixing options

Embedded Through Retrofit (epoxy


grouted bolts)

Fuse bolts available on special request.

M1100-S10-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


10–9

PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

PROJECT DETAILS PROJECT STATUS

Port TMS Ref:

Project Preliminary

Designer Detail design

Contractor Tender

BOLLARD TYPE Quantity ___________ No. Quantity ___________ No.

Capacity/SWL _________t Capacity/SWL _________t

Tee Tee
Tee Horn Kidney Horn Horn
Kidney Kidney

VESSEL INFORMATION LOA __________________m LOA __________________m

Overall length (LOA) MD __________________m MD __________________m


Displacement (MD)
Deadweight (DWT) DWT _________________t DWT _________________t

LINE ANGLE

Min _______________ deg Max _______________ deg

Min _______________ deg Max _______________ deg

MOUNTING

Recessed Recessed

Recessed Surface Surface Surface

OTHER INFORMATION FURTHER DETAILS AVAILABLE FROM

Name
Position
Company
Tel
Fax

Email

M1100-S10-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


Harbour Marine

Section 11

Trelleborg Marine Systems


Quick Release
Hooks
Docking Aid
Systems
www.trelleborg.com/marine Environmental
Ref. M1100-S11-V1.2-EN
Monitoring
11–2

TRELLEBORG
HARBOUR
MARINE
Trelleborg Harbour Marine (THM) has been
a leading global manufacturer of advanced
docking, mooring and monitoring systems for
the oil and gas industries since 1971.
The rapid growth in oil and gas terminals
and their safety-first philosophy has led to
sophisticated systems integration.
THM leads the way with a wide range
of modular hardware, control and
instrumentation solutions that all help to
ensure safe berthing and mooring in critical
and demanding environments.
All systems are extensively tested and
proven in practice – the main reason why
Trelleborg Harbour Marine is the preferred
supplier on most of the world’s latest LNG
terminal projects.

Safety First The Safety Cycle


Every component of every THM module is
designed with safety in mind:

B Equipment is fully certified for hazardous


locations
B Failsafe designs prevent accidents and
unexpected events
B Operators are kept clear of dangerous zones
B Early warning and predictive systems reduce
risk levels.

Productivity
Solutions are tailored for every project:

B Better control over vessel approach reduces


turnaround times
B Automation and shared information means
more efficient operations
B Data logging helps optimise and fine-tune
procedures
B Systems easily upgraded or expanded to
meet future needs

M1100-S11-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


11–3

INTEGRATED SOLUTIONS
Integration is the key to maximum
mum safety and
optimum productivity. Trelleborg
org Harbour
Marine solutions can combine e the outputs
from docking and mooring systems
stems
with environmental and forecasting
asting
data, fender monitoring and drift
warning devices. Local and centrally
entrally
processed information is then n
redistributed to virtual consoles,
les,
local and remote alarms and
to portable receivers on the
terminal or ship.
Retrofits and upgrades aree
also available, so even older
facilities can benefit from
the latest technology, or
systems can be added
to as needs change. All
modules are available for THM M and
alternative manufacturer hooksks and hardware.

Typical Harbour Marine Integrated Solution


Hook Bases
 Load monitoring SmartDock® SmartDock®
 Remote release hooks Laser 1 Laser 2
Jetty/Wharf
Alarm Siren
Remote Display
Board
Capstan Motor
d
ar

SmartHook® SmartHook® SmartHook® SmartHook®


Bo
l ay
sp

Ethernet
Di

Switch
Console
Jetty Controller
Operator 1

Harbour Marine PC Console


Interface
Program

Operator 2
Databases Mooring & Monitoring
System (MMS)
Mooring
Remote maintenance Data
Local MMS
Vessel History Docking
dial-up facility tables Data Data Client GUI
Tag
Definition
Alarm
File Server MMS Server(s)

Report Carry-on Operator n


Generator Workstation Pager
Server Messenger
Environmental Environmental Environmental
Report Logger Server
Generator Handheld
Environmental Server
Data Log Files Wave Current
Sensor Sensor
Report Printer Interface Interface

Alarm Printer

Carry-on unit Antenna Carry-on unit


laptop transmitter
Temperature
Pressure Wind Speed
Humidity & Direction

Pagers Antenna Pager transmitter

M1100-S11-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


11–4

QUICK
RELEASE
HOOKS
Quick Release Hooks (QRH) enable
mooring lines to be quickly and
easily released, even under full load
conditions.
A variety of mounting options
exist for the quick release hook.
Typically a cast QRH base is used for
new installations. To upgrade older
facilities, fabricated hook bases
can be designed to suit existing
hold-down bolt patterns to replace
bollards or old QRHs. THM hooks can
also be retrofitted to existing bases
from other suppliers, considerably
reducing on-site civil works.

Hook features
B Single and multiple hook arrays in
sizes to suit all applications
B Base designs available to suit new,
retrofit and upgrade projects
B Integrated capstans with motors
protected within the mounting base
B Hazardous area certified (where
applicable)
B Hooks can work at large horizontal
and vertical angles
B ‘Fail safe’ release mechanisms are
enclosed within the hook body
B Hooks permit controlled release at
all working loads
B 20kg release lever load complies
with health and safety guidelines
B Counterbalanced hook for easy
reset
B Cast hook profile minimises chafing
of mooring lines Every hook is factory tested and certified to at least 125% of rated load.
B Low maintenance, durable design is
well proven, reliable and refined
Applications
B LNG carrier berths B Coal/iron ore berths
B Oil berths B RoRo terminals
B LPG berths B Container terminals
B Bulk liquids berths

M1100-S11-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


11–5

QUICK RELEASE HOOKS


Capstans Manual Release
Capstan motors are fully enclosed within All hook release components are enclosed within the
the hook base for ultra-low maintenance, hook side plates, protecting the mechanism from debris
corrosion protection and reliability. and damage. A 20kg force is required to release the
Various load ratings and running hook at full load whilst a single operator stands safely
speeds are available to suit behind the hook.
all ship sizes and mooring line
materials. Rope Guards
Rope guards preventing slack
Hazardous Area mooring lines from accidentally
Operations detaching at high vertical
All electrical angles.
components
are certified Positive Hook
for hazardous Locking
area operations The fail safe hook
(where required). mechanism ensures
The hook design a positive reset
prevents contact confirmed by easy visual
with the structure check (with optional remote
during mooring and verification). This prevents hair-
on release, eliminating trigger and accidental release
spark risk. which can occur with inferior
designs.
Mounting Bases
Single or multiple hook Counterbalanced Hooks
configurations are available. Bases The cast mooring hook is
can be cast or fabricated to suit counterbalanced for easy
new or retrofit installations. Upgrade reset by operators. The smooth
options include bases to fit existing Large Mooring Angles hook profile properly supports
anchor arrays. Hooks can rotate under full load through mooring ropes, reducing stress
horizontal angles up to ±90° and vertical concentrations and chafing.
angles up to 45°. Hinge pins will never freeze
and need minimal maintenance.

Upgrades

EasyMoor Load Monitoring Remote Release

Calibration Rigs Remote MLM Displays Remote Release Console

M1100-S11-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


11–6

QUICK RELEASE HOOKS


Single hook Double hook

C C
D
D E E
90°
90° 45°
ØA ØB
90° ØA ØB F
45°
90°

ØI ØI

G G
J J

H H

Triple hook Quadruple hook

C C
D E D E
90° 90°
45° 45°
F F
45° 45°
ØA ØB 45°
45°
F ØA ØB F
45° 45°
90° 45°
F
45°
90°

ØI
ØI

G
G
J
J

H
H

M1100-S11-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


11–7

QUICK RELEASE HOOKS


Hooks A B C D E F G H I J Anchors Quantity
45 Series
Single 1100 900 2060 550 960 – 1220 120 305 480 M56 × 1000 4
Double 1100 900 1945 435 960 450 1220 120 305 480 M56 × 1000 5
Triple 1300 1100 1980 370 960 510 1220 120 305 480 M56 × 1000 6
Quadruple 1500 1300 2150 440 960 450 1220 160 305 480 M56 × 1000 10
60 Series
Single 1100 900 2020 550 920 – 1220 120 305 430 M56 × 1000 4
Double 1100 900 1905 435 920 450 1220 120 305 430 M56 × 1000 5
Triple 1300 1100 1940 370 920 510 1220 120 305 430 M56 × 1000 6
Quadruple 1500 1300 2110 440 920 450 1220 160 305 430 M56 × 1000 10
75 Series
Single 1100 900 2020 550 920 – 1220 120 305 430 M56 × 1000 4
Double 1100 900 1905 435 920 450 1220 120 305 430 M56 × 1000 5
Triple 1300 1100 1940 370 920 510 1220 120 305 430 M56 × 1000 6
Quadruple 1500 1300 2110 440 920 450 1220 160 305 430 M56 × 1000 10
100 Series
Single 1100 900 2125 550 1025 – 1220 120 305 440 M56 × 1000 4
Double 1100 900 2010 435 1025 450 1220 120 305 440 M56 × 1000 7
Triple 1300 1100 2045 370 1025 510 1220 120 305 440 M56 × 1000 10
Quadruple 1500 1300 2215 440 1025 450 1220 160 305 440 M56 × 1000 14
125 Series
Single 1100 900 2125 550 1025 – 1220 120 305 440 M56 × 1000 4
Double 1100 900 2010 435 1025 450 1220 120 305 440 M56 × 1000 7
Triple 1300 1100 2045 370 1025 510 1220 120 305 440 M56 × 1000 10
Quadruple 1500 1300 2215 440 1025 450 1220 160 305 440 M56 × 1000 14
150R Series
Single 1100 900 2150 575 1025 – 1270 120 305 465 M56 × 1000 7
Double 1300 1100 2045 370 1025 590 1270 120 305 480 M56 × 1000 10
Triple 1500 1300 2275 500 1025 590 1270 160 305 480 M56 × 1000 14
Quadruple 2000 1780 2625 600 1025 590 1270 180 305 490 M56 × 1000 14
The hook series designates the safe working load of each hook. (eg. 75 Series hooks have an SWL of 75 tonnes) [ Units: mm ]
All hooks are proof loaded to their corresponding proof load.
Mounting bases are designed to accept the combined loads from multiple hooks.
Dimensions are typical and nominal. Always request a certified hook or base drawing before starting any construction.
Capstan heights (G) may vary slightly depending on capacity selection.
Drawings may change due to our continuous improvement processes. Current drawings will be provided on request.
Custom bases are available on request to suit existing bolt patterns or unique applications.

Operating envelopes
Hook horizontal
range
Hook vertical
Foot switch range

45°

User operating
envelope

M1100-S11-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


11–8

DOCKING AID SYSTEMS


SmartDock® is a family of docking
aid systems (DAS) used by jetty
operators and pilots to monitor the
approach of berthing ships. Systems
are based on lasers, differential GPS
or Real Time Kinematic (RTK) GPS
technologies.

SmartDock® Laser
SmartDock® Laser uses a pair
of laser sensors to measure the
distance and angle of a docking ship
in the critical range of 200m to 0m
from the berthing line.
Lasers will function in poor
visibility including heavy rain and are
eye-safe to the highest FDA Class 1
standard.
The data provided to jetty
operators, pilots and ship masters is
used to prevent over-speed and large
angle approaches, allowing early
corrections to the manoeuvre long
before a potential accident situation
arises.
SmartDock® Laser can be
switched to drift-off when the ship is Options and upgrades
moored. At a preset distance from
the berthing line, alarms are raised
on the jetty and ship. On oil and gas
jetties this provides added protection
for the loading arms.

Features
B Two jetty mounted laser sensors
B Jetty controller/interface unit
B Computer workstation to monitor,
display and record data Handheld Displays Jetty Displays
B Drift-off warning whilst berthed

Options
B Handheld monitors
B Jetty mounted display board
showing distance, speed and angle
B Approach speed green-amber-red
warning lights
B Remote indicator for jetty docking
crew Jetty Indicators Traffic Lights

M1100-S11-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


11–9

DOCKING AID SYSTEMS

Lasers provide centimetre accuracy in The berthing approach is monitored Data for every berthing is logged for
all weathers at ranges up to 200m. remotely with early warning alarms. later analysis and training.

SmartDock® GPS
SmartDock® GPS offers high
precision navigation and berthing.
Positional accuracy is better than
60cm using differentially corrected
GPS (DGPS). With Real Time
Kinematic (RTK) GPS technology, up Berthing mode
to 3cm precision is achievable.
Vessels are displayed on digital
charts that also show superimposed
jetty structures.
Rate of turn and heading accuracy
is better than the ship’s own onboard
equipment. The position of other
vessels can be integrated with
the display using an Automated
Information System (AIS) feed. Piloting mode

M1100-S11-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


11–10

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
6
Wind, wave and current forces can
significantly affect vessel handling, Forecasting services can give 0.5 day lead
particularly during low speed advance warning of possible 2 day lead
5 disruptions to operations.
manoeuvres. Most larger oil and LNG 5 day lead
facilities now require meteorological Measured
and oceanographic (MetOcean)
sensors to provide this data whilst 4
ships are docking and moored.
Data is collected from a variety Wave height (m)
of MetOcean sensors via cable or 3
telemetry and can be relayed to
portable monitors carried by pilots
and other remote users. 2

Weather station
Typically located on the roof of the 1
Jetty Control Building, the weather
station can log wind speed/direction,
barometric pressure, humidity,
0
temperature and rainfall. Visibility 1 5 10 15 20 25 30
sensors are optional. Day

Current monitoring
Current speed and direction are
measured at fixed depths or over the
full water column at one or multiple
sites along the jetty. It is also
common to add remote sensors in
turning basins, approach channels
and at offshore mooring locations.

Wave and tide data


Wave height, profile and tide data
are provided by a non-contact laser Offshore current meter Side looking current meter
mounted to the jetty. Wave direction
can also be measured using
immersed sensors or buoys.

Forecasting Services
Real-time forecasting services
improve productivity and safety by
predicting weather and wave heights
to give advance warning of significant
events which may hamper berthing,
mooring, cargo transfer or departure.

Typical MetOcean virtual display Non-contact wave height laser

M1100-S11-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


11–11

Proven
in practice

M1100-S11-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


Fender Design

Section 12

Trelleborg Marine Systems


Ship Tables
Berthing Modes
Coefficients
Berth Layout
www.trelleborg.com/marine Panel Design
Materials
Ref. M1100-S12-V1.2-EN Fender Testing
12–2

FENDER DESIGN
Fenders must reliably protect ships,
structures and themselves. They
must work every day for many years
in severe environments with little or
no maintenance.
As stated in the British
Standard†, fender design should
be entrusted to ‘appropriately
qualified and experienced people’.
Fender engineering requires an
understanding of many areas:

B Ship technology
B Civil construction methods
B Steel fabrications
B Material properties
B Installation techniques
B Health and safety
B Environmental factors
B Regulations and codes of practice

Using this guide

This guide should assist with many


of the frequently asked questions
which arise during fender design. All
methods described are based on the
latest recommendations of PIANC*
as well as other internationally
recognised codes of practice.
Methods are also adapted to
working practices within Trelleborg
and to suit Trelleborg products.
Further design tools and utilities
including generic specifications,
Codes and guidelines
energy calculation spreadsheets,
fender performance curves and much ROM 0.2-90 1990 Actions in the Design of Maritime and Harbor
more can be downloaded from the Works
Trelleborg Marine Systems website † BS6349 : Part 4 : 1994 1994 Code of Practice for Design of Fendering and
(www.trelleborg.com/marine). Mooring Systems

Exceptions EAU 1996 1996 Recommendations of the Committee for


Waterfront Structures
These guidelines do not encompass PIANC Bulletin 95 1997 Approach Channels – A Guide to Design
unusual ships, extreme berthing Supplement to Bulletin No.95 (1997) PIANC
conditions and other extreme cases
for which specialist advice should be Japanese MoT 911 1998 Technical Note of the Port and Harbour
sought. Research Institute, Ministry of Transport, Japan
No. 911, Sept 1998

* PIANC 2002 2002 Guidelines for the Design of Fender Systems :


2002 Marcom Report of WG33

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–3

GLOSSARY

Commonly used symbols


Symbol Definition Units
B Beam of vessel (excluding beltings and strakes) m
C Positive clearance between hull of vessel and face of structure m
CB Block coefficient of vessel’s hull –
CC Berth configuration coefficient –
CE Eccentricity coefficient –
CM Added mass coefficient (virtual mass coefficient) –
CS Softness coefficient –
D Draft of vessel m
EN Normal berthing energy to be absorbed by fender kNm
EA Abnormal berthing energy to be absorbed by fender kNm
FL Freeboard at laden draft m
FS Abnormal impact safety factor –
H Height of compressible part of fender m
K Radius of gyration of vessel m
KC Under keel clearance m
LOA Overall length of vessel’s hull m
LBP Length of vessel’s hull between perpendiculars m
LS Overall length of the smallest vessel using the berth m
LL Overall length of the largest vessel using the berth m
M Displacement of the vessel tonne
M50 Displacement of the vessel at 50% confidence limit tonne
M75 Displacement of the vessel at 75% confidence limit tonne
MD Displacement of vessel tonne
P Fender pitch or spacing m
R Distance from point of contact to the centre of mass of the vessel m
RF Reaction force of fender kN
V Velocity of vessel (true vector) m/s
VB Approach velocity of the vessel perpendicular to the berthing line m/s
α Berthing angle degree
δ Deflection of the fender unit % or m
θ Hull contact angle with fender degree
μ Coefficient of friction –
ϕ Velocity vector angle (between R and V) degree

Definitions
Rubber fender Units made from vulcanised rubber (often with encapsulated steel plates) that absorbs energy by
elastically deforming in compression, bending or shear or a combination of these effects.
Pneumatic fender Units comprising fabric reinforced rubber bags filled with air under pressure and that absorb energy
from the work done in compressing the air above its normal initial pressure.
Foam fender Units comprising a closed cell foam inner core with reinforced polymer outer skin that absorb
energy by virtue of the work done in compressing the foam.
Steel Panel A structural steel frame designed to distribute the forces generated during rubber fender
compression.

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–4

WHY FENDER?
‘There is a simple reason to use fenders: it is just too
expensive not to do so’. These are the opening remarks of 10 reasons for quality fendering
PIANC* and remain the primary reason why every modern port
invests in protecting their structures with fenders. B Safety of staff, ships and structures
Well-designed fender systems will reduce construction B Much lower lifecycle costs
costs and will contribute to making the berth more efficient by B Rapid, trouble-free installation
improving turn-around times. It follows that the longer a fender B Quicker turnaround time, greater efficiency
system lasts and the less maintenance it needs, the better the B Reduced maintenance and repair
investment. B Berths in more exposed locations
It is rare for the very cheapest fenders to offer the lowest B Better ship stability when moored
long term cost. Quite the opposite is true. A small initial saving B Lower structural loads
will often demand much greater investment in repairs and B Accommodate more ship types and sizes
upkeep over the years. A cheap fender system can cost many B More satisfied customers
times that of a well-engineered, higher quality solution over the
lifetime of the berth as the graphs below demonstrate.

Capital costs Maintenance costs


180 700

160
600

er
Other costs

Oth
140
500
120

100 400
COST
80 300 SAVING
Purchase price

60
200
o rg
40 Trelleb

100
20

0 0
Trelleborg Other 10 20 30 40 50
Service life (years)

Purchase price Wear & tear


+ Design approvals + Replacements
+ Delivery delays + Damage repairs
+ Installation time + Removal & scrapping
+ Site support + Fatigue, corrosion
= Capital cost = Maintenance cost

Capital cost + Maintenance cost = FULL LIFE COST

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–5

DESIGN FLOWCHART
Functional

B type(s) of cargo B better stability on berth


B safe berthing and mooring B reduction of reaction force

Operational
B berthing procedures B light, laden or partly laden ships
B frequency of berthing B stand-off from face of structure
B limits of mooring and operations (crane reach)
(adverse weather) B fender spacing
B range of vessel sizes, types B type and orientation of
B special features of vessels waterfront structure
(flare, beltings, list, etc) B special requirements
B allowable hull pressures B spares availability

Site conditions
B wind speed B topography B temperature
B wave height B tidal range B corrosivity
B current speed B swell and fetch B channel depth

Design criteria
B codes and standards B safety factors (normal/abnormal)
B design vessels for calculations B maintenance cost/frequency
B normal/abnormal velocity B installation cost/practicality
B maximum reaction force B chemical pollution
B friction coefficient B accident response
B desired service life

Design criteria

Calculation of berthing energy Mooring layout


CM virtual mass factor CC berth configuration factor B location of mooring B strength and type B pre-tensioning of
CE eccentricity factor CS softness factor equipment and/or dolphins of mooring lines mooring lines

Calculation of fender energy absorption Assume fender system and type


B selection of abnormal berthing safety factor

Computer simulation (first series)


Selection of appropriate fenders

Check results
Determination of:
B check vessel motions in six B check deflection, energy and
B energy absorption B environmental factors B frictional loads
degrees of freedom reaction force
B reaction force B angular compression B chains etc
B check vessel acceleration B check mooring line forces
B deflection B hull pressure

Check impact on structure and vessel Computer simulation (optimisation)


B horizontal and vertical loading B implications of installing the
B chance of hitting the structure fender
(bulbous bows etc) B bevels/snagging from hull
B face of structure to protrusions
accommodate fender B restraint chains

Final selection of fender


B determine main characteristics B check availability of fender
of fender B track record and warranties
B PIANC Type Approved B future spares availability
B verification test methods B fatigue/durability tests

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–6

THE DESIGN PROCESS


Many factors contribute to the design of a fender:

Ships
Ship design evolves constantly – shapes
change and many vessel types are getting
larger. Fenders must suit current ships and
those expected to arrive in the foreseeable
future.

Structures
Fenders impose loads on the berthing
structure. Many berths are being built in
exposed locations, where fenders can
play a crucial role in the overall cost of
construction. Local practice, materials
and conditions may influence the choice
of fender.

Berthing
Many factors will affect how vessels
approach the berth, the corresponding
kinetic energy and the load applied to the
structure. Berthing modes may affect the
choice of ship speed and the safety factor
for abnormal conditions.

Installation and maintenance


Fender installation should be considered
early in the design process. Accessibility
for maintenance, wear allowances and
the protective coatings will all affect the
full life cost of systems. The right fender
choice can improve turnaround times
and reduce downtime. The safety of
personnel, structures and vessels must be
considered at every stage – before, during
and after commissioning.

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–7

ENVIRONMENT
Typical berthing locations
Berthing structures are located in a variety of places from sheltered basins to unprotected, open waters. Local
conditions will play a large part in deciding the berthing speeds and approach angles, in turn affecting the type and size
of suitable fenders.

Non-tidal basins
With minor changes in water
level, these locations are usually
sheltered from strong winds,
waves and currents. Ship sizes
may be restricted due to lock
access.

Tidal basins
Larger variations in water level
(depends on location) but still
generally sheltered from winds,
waves and currents. May be used
by larger vessels than non-tidal
basins.

Coastal berths
Maximum exposure to
winds, waves and currents. River berths
Berths generally used by Largest tidal range (depends on site),
single classes of vessel with greater exposure to winds, waves
such as oil, gas or bulk. and currents. Approach mode may be
restricted by dredged channels and
by flood and ebb tides. Structures on
river bends may complicate berthing
manoeuvres.

Tides Currents and winds


Tides vary by area and may have HRT Current and wind forces can push
extremes of a few centimetres HAT vessels onto or off the berth, and
MHWS
(Mediterranean, Baltic) or over 15 MHWN may influence the berthing speed.
metres (parts of UK and Canada). Once berthed, and provided the
MSL
Tides will influence the structure’s vessel contacts several fenders,
design and fender selection. MLWN
the forces are usually less critical.
However special cases do exist,
HRT Highest Recorded Tide MLWS especially on very soft structures.
HAT Highest Astronomical Tide LAT As a general guide, deep draught
MHWS Mean High Water Spring LRT vessels (such as tankers) will be
MHWN Mean High Water Neap more affected by current and high
MLWN Mean Low Water Neap freeboard vessels (such as RoRo
MLWS Mean Low Water Spring and container ships) will be more
LAT Lowest Astronomical Tide affected by strong winds.
LRT Lowest Recorded Tide

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–8

STRUCTURES
The preferred jetty structure can influence the fender design and vice versa. The type of structure depends on local
practice, the geology at the site, available materials and other factors.
Selecting an appropriate fender at an early stage can have a major effect on the overall project cost. Below are some
typical structures and fender design considerations.

Features Design considerations

Open pile jetties B Simple and cost-effective B Low reaction reduces pile
sizes and concrete mass
B Good for deeper waters
B Best to keep fixings above
B Load-sensitive
piles and low tide
B Limited fixing area for fenders
B Suits cantilever panel designs
B Vulnerable to bulbous bows

Dolphins B Common for oil and gas terminals B Few but large fenders
B Very load-sensitive B Total reliability needed
B Flexible structures need careful B Low reactions preferred
design to match fender loads
B Large panels for low hull
B Structural repairs are costly pressures need chains etc

Monopiles B Inexpensive structures B Fenders should be designed


for fast installation
B Loads are critical
B Restricted access means low
B Not suitable for all geologies
maintenance fenders
B Suits remote locations
B Low reactions must be
B Quick to construct matched to structure

B Parallel motion systems

Mass structures B Most common in areas with small tides B Keep anchors above low tide
B Fender reaction not critical B Care needed selecting fender
spacing and projection
B Avoid fixings spanning pre-cast and
in situ sections or expansion joints B Suits cast-in or retrofit anchors

B Many options for fender types

Sheet piles
B Quick to construct B Fixing fenders direct to piles
difficult due to build tolerances
B Mostly used in low corrosion regions
B Keep anchors above low tide
B In situ concrete copes are common
B Care needed selecting fender
B Can suffer from ALWC (accelerated
spacing and projection
low water corrosion)

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–9

SHIP TYPES
General cargo ship
B Prefer small gaps between ship and quay to minimise outreach of cranes.
B Large change of draft between laden and empty conditions.
B May occupy berths for long periods.
B Coastal cargo vessels may berth without tug assistance.

Bulk carrier
B Need to be close to berth face to minimise shiploader outreach.
B Possible need to warp ships along berth for shiploader to change holds.
B Large change of draft between laden and empty conditions.
B Require low hull contact pressures unless belted.

Container ship
B Flared bows are prone to strike shore structures.
B Increasing ship beams needs increase crane outreach.
B Some vessels have single or multiple beltings.
B Bulbous bows may strike front piles of structures at large berthing angles.
B Require low hull contact pressures unless belted.

Oil tanker
B Need to avoid fire hazards from sparks or friction.
B Large change of draft between laden and empty conditions.
B Require low hull contact pressures.
B Coastal tankers may berth without tug assistance.

RoRo ship
B Ships have own loading ramps – usually stern, slewed or side doors.
B High lateral and/or transverse berthing speeds.
B Manoeuvrability at low speeds may be poor.
B End berthing impacts often occur.
B Many different shapes, sizes and condition of beltings.

Passenger (cruise) ship


B Small draft change between laden and empty.
B White or light coloured hulls are easily marked.
B Flared bows are prone to strike shore structures.
B Require low hull contact pressures unless belted.

Ferry
B Quick turn around needed.
B High berthing speeds, often with end berthing.
B Intensive use of berth.
B Berthing without tug assistance.
B Many different shapes, sizes and condition of beltings.

Gas carrier
B Need to avoid fire hazards from sparks or friction.
B Shallow draft even at full load.
B Require low hull contact pressures.
B Single class of vessels using dedicated facilities.
B Manifolds not necessarily at midships position.

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–10

SHIP FEATURES

Common on container vessels and cruise ships.


Bow Big flare angles may affect fender performance.
flares Larger fender may be required to maintain
clearance from the quay structure, cranes, etc.

Most modern ships have bulbous bows. Care is


Bulbous needed at large berthing angles or with widely
bows spaced fenders to ensure the bulbous bow does
not catch behind the fender or hit structural piles.

Almost every class of ship could be fitted with


beltings or strakes. They are most common on
Beltings &
RoRo ships or ferries, but may even appear on
strakes
container ships or gas carriers. Tugs and offshore
supply boats have very large beltings.

Cruise and RoRo ships often have flying bridges.


Flying In locks, or when tides are large, care is needed to
bridge avoid the bridge sitting on top of the fender during
a falling tide.

Barges, small tankers and general cargo ships can


Low have a small freeboard. Fenders should extend
freeboard down so that vessels cannot catch underneath at
low tides and when fully laden.

RoRo ships, car carriers and some navy vessels


Stern & have large doors for vehicle access. These are
side doors often recessed and can snag fenders – especially
in locks or when warping along the berth.

Ships with high freeboard include ferries, cruise


High and container ships, as well as many lightly loaded
freeboard vessels. Strong winds can cause sudden, large
increases in berthing speeds.

Many modern ships, but especially tankers


Low hull and gas carriers, require very low hull contact
pressure pressures, which are achieved using large fender
panels or floating fenders.

High speed catamarans and monohulls are


often built from aluminium. They can only accept
Aluminium
loads from fenders at special positions: usually
hulls
reinforced beltings set very low or many metres
above the waterline.
Many ships are modified during their lifetime with
little regard to the effect these changes may have
Special
on berthing or fenders. Protrusions can snag
features
fenders but risks are reduced by large bevels and
chamfers on the frontal panels.

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–11

BERTHING MODES

Side berthing

α
Typical values
ϕ
0° ≤ α ≤ 15°
100mm/s ≤ V ≤ 300mm/s
V 60° ≤ ϕ ≤ 90°

Dolphin berthing

Tug α
Typical values

0° ≤ α ≤ 10°
ϕ
100mm/s ≤ V ≤ 200mm/s

V 30° ≤ ϕ ≤ 90°

End berthing

α
Typical values
ϕ
V 0° ≤ α ≤ 10°
200mm/s ≤ V ≤ 500mm/s

0° ≤ ϕ ≤ 10°

Lock entrances

Typical values
ϕ
V 0° ≤ α ≤ 30°

α 300mm/s ≤ V ≤ 2000mm/s

0° ≤ ϕ ≤ 30°

Ship-to-ship berthing

ϕ Typical values
α
0° ≤ α ≤ 15°
150mm/s ≤ V ≤ 500mm/s
V
60° ≤ ϕ ≤ 90°

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–12

BERTHING ENERGY
The kinetic energy of a berthing ship needs to be absorbed by a suitable fender system and this is most commonly
carried out using well recognised deterministic methods as outlined in the following sections.

Normal Berthing Energy (EN)


Most berthings will have energy less than or equal to the normal berthing energy (EN). The calculation should take into
account worst combinations of vessel displacement, velocity, angle as well as the various coefficients. Allowance should
also be made for how often the berth is used, any tidal restrictions, experience of the operators, berth type, wind and
current exposure.

The normal energy to be absorbed by the fender can be calculated as:

EN = 0.5 × M × VB2 × CM × CE × CC × CS

Where,
EN = Normal berthing energy to be absorbed by the fender (kNm)
M = Mass of the vessel (displacement in tonne) at chosen confidence level.*
VB = Approach velocity component perpendicular to the berthing line† (m/s).
CM = Added mass coefficient
CE = Eccentricity coefficient
CC = Berth configuration coefficient
CS = Softness coefficient

* PIANC suggests 50% or 75% confidence limits (M50 or M75) are appropriate to most cases.

Berthing velocity (VB) is usually based on displacement at 50% confidence limit (M50).

Abnormal Berthing Energy (EA)


Abnormal impacts arise when the normal energy is exceeded. Causes PIANC Factors of Safety (FS)
may include human error, malfunctions, exceptional weather conditions
or a combination of these factors. Vessel type Size FS

Largest 1.25
The abnormal energy to be absorbed by the fender can be calculated as: Tanker, bulk, cargo
Smallest 1.75

Largest 1.5
EA = FS × EN Container
Smallest 2.0

General cargo 1.75


Where,
RoRo, ferries ≥ 2.0
EA = Abnormal berthing energy to be absorbed by the fender (kNm)
FS = Safety factor for abnormal berthings Tugs, workboats, etc 2.0

Choosing a suitable safety factor (FS) will depend on many factors: Source: PIANC 2002; Table 4.2.5.

B The consequences a fender failure may have on berth operations. PIANC recommends that ‘the factor of
B How frequently the berth is used. abnormal impact when derived should be
B Very low design berthing speeds which might easily be exceeded. not be less than 1.1 nor more than 2.0
B Vulnerability to damage of the supporting structure. unless exception circumstances prevail’.
B Range of vessel sizes and types using the berth. Source: PIANC 2002; Section 4.2.8.5.
B Hazardous or valuable cargoes including people.

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–13

SHIP DEFINITIONS
Many different definitions are used to describe ship sizes and classes. Some of the more common descriptions are
given below.

Vessel Type Length × Beam × Draft DWT Comments


1st Generation container
Small feeder 200m × 23m × 9m
<1,000 teu
2nd Generation container
Feeder 215m × 30m × 10m
1,000–2,500 teu
3rd Generation container
Panamax1 290m × 32.3m × 12m
2,500–5,000 teu
4th Generation container
Post-Panamax 305m × >32.3m × 13m
5,000–8,000 teu
5th Generation container
Super post-Panamax (VLCS)
>8,000 teu
Suezmax 2 500m × 70m × 21.3m All vessel types in Suez Canal
Seaway-Max3 233.5m × 24.0m × 9.1m All vessel types in St Lawrence Seaway
Handysize 10,000–40,000 dwt Bulk carrier
Cape Size 130,000–200,000 dwt Bulk carrier
Very large bulk carrier (VLBC) >200,000 dwt Bulk carrier
Very large crude carrier (VLCC) 200,000–300,000 dwt Oil tanker
Ultra large crude carrier (ULCC) >300,000 dwt Oil tanker

1. Panama Canal 2. Suez Canal 3. St Lawrence Seaway


Lock chambers are 305m long and The canal, connecting the Mediterranean The seaway system allows ships to
33.5m wide. The largest depth of the and Red Sea, is about 163km long and pass from the Atlantic Ocean to the
canal is 12.5–13.7m. The canal is about varies from 80–135m wide. It has no Great Lakes via six short canals totalling
86km long and passage takes eight lock chambers but most of the canal has 110km, with 19 locks, each 233m long,
hours. a single traffic lane with passing bays. 24.4m wide and 9.1m deep.

The ship tables show laden draft (DL) of vessels. The draft of a partly loaded ship (D) can be estimated using the
formula below:

LWT
MD = LWT + DWT
+ DWT =
MD

DL × LWT DL × (MD – DWT) D


D≈ =
MD MD
DL

USING SHIP TABLES


50% 75% Ship tables originally appeared in PIANC 2002. They are divided into
Confidence Limits (CL) which are defined as the proportion of ships of the
same DWT with dimensions equal to or less than those in the table. PIANC
considers 50% to 75% confidence limits are the most appropriate for design.
Please ask Trelleborg Marine Systems for supplementary tables of latest
and largest vessel types including Container, RoRo, Cruise and LNG.

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–14

50%

SHIP TABLES
smaller larger

Wind area
Displacement
Type DWT/GRT LOA LBP B FL DL Lateral Front
M50
Full Load Ballast Full Load Ballast
1000 1580 63 58 10.3 1.6 3.6 227 292 59 88
2000 3040 78 72 12.4 1.9 4.5 348 463 94 134
3000 4460 88 82 13.9 2.1 5.1 447 605 123 172
5000 7210 104 96 16.0 2.3 6.1 612 849 173 236
General 7000 9900 115 107 17.6 2.5 6.8 754 1060 216 290
cargo ship 10000 13900 128 120 19.5 2.7 7.6 940 1340 274 361
15000 20300 146 136 21.8 3.0 8.7 1210 1760 359 463
20000 26600 159 149 23.6 3.1 9.6 1440 2130 435 552
30000 39000 181 170 26.4 3.5 10.9 1850 2780 569 709
40000 51100 197 186 28.6 3.7 12.0 2210 3370 690 846
5000 6740 106 98 15.0 2.3 6.1 615 850 205 231
7000 9270 116 108 16.6 2.6 6.7 710 1010 232 271
10000 13000 129 120 18.5 2.9 7.5 830 1230 264 320
15000 19100 145 135 21.0 3.3 8.4 980 1520 307 387
20000 25000 157 148 23.0 3.6 9.2 1110 1770 341 443
30000 36700 176 167 26.1 4.1 10.3 1320 2190 397 536
Bulk carrier
50000 59600 204 194 32.3 4.8 12.0 1640 2870 479 682
70000 81900 224 215 32.3 5.3 13.3 1890 3440 542 798
100000 115000 248 239 37.9 5.9 14.8 2200 4150 619 940
150000 168000 279 270 43.0 6.6 16.7 2610 5140 719 1140
200000 221000 303 294 47.0 7.2 18.2 2950 5990 800 1310
250000 273000 322 314 50.4 7.8 19.4 3240 6740 868 1450
7000 10200 116 108 19.6 2.4 6.9 1320 1360 300 396
10000 14300 134 125 21.6 3.0 7.7 1690 1700 373 477
15000 21100 157 147 24.1 3.9 8.7 2250 2190 478 591
20000 27800 176 165 26.1 4.6 9.5 2750 2620 569 687
Container
ship 25000 34300 192 180 27.7 5.2 10.2 3220 3010 652 770
30000 40800 206 194 29.1 5.8 10.7 3660 3370 729 850
40000 53700 231 218 32.3 6.8 11.7 4480 4040 870 990
50000 66500 252 238 32.3 7.7 12.5 5230 4640 990 1110
60000 79100 271 256 35.2 8.5 13.2 5950 5200 1110 1220
1000 1450 59 54 9.7 0.5 3.8 170 266 78 80
2000 2810 73 68 12.1 0.7 4.7 251 401 108 117
3000 4140 83 77 13.7 1.0 5.3 315 509 131 146
5000 6740 97 91 16.0 1.4 6.1 419 689 167 194
7000 9300 108 102 17.8 1.7 6.7 505 841 196 233
10000 13100 121 114 19.9 2.0 7.5 617 1040 232 284
15000 19200 138 130 22.5 2.6 8.4 770 1320 281 355
Oil tanker 20000 25300 151 143 24.6 3.1 9.1 910 1560 322 416
30000 37300 171 163 27.9 3.7 10.3 1140 1990 390 520
50000 60800 201 192 32.3 4.9 11.9 1510 2690 497 689
70000 83900 224 214 36.3 5.7 13.2 1830 3280 583 829
100000 118000 250 240 40.6 6.8 14.6 2230 4050 690 1010
150000 174000 284 273 46.0 8.3 16.4 2800 5150 840 1260
200000 229000 311 300 50.3 9.4 17.9 3290 6110 960 1480
300000 337000 354 342 57.0 11.4 20.1 4120 7770 1160 1850

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–15

50%

SHIP TABLES
smaller larger

Wind area
Displacement
Type DWT/GRT LOA LBP B FL DL Lateral Front
M50
Full Load Ballast Full Load Ballast
1000 1970 66 60 13.2 2.0 3.2 700 810 216 217
2000 3730 85 78 15.6 2.9 4.1 970 1110 292 301
3000 5430 99 90 17.2 3.6 4.8 1170 1340 348 364
5000 8710 119 109 19.5 4.7 5.8 1480 1690 435 464
RoRo ship 7000 11900 135 123 21.2 5.5 6.6 1730 1970 503 544
10000 16500 153 141 23.1 6.7 7.5 2040 2320 587 643
15000 24000 178 163 25.6 8.2 8.7 2460 2790 701 779
20000 31300 198 182 27.4 9.5 9.7 2810 3180 794 890
30000 45600 229 211 30.3 11.7 11.3 3400 3820 950 1080
1000 850 60 54 11.4 2.2 1.9 426 452 167 175
2000 1580 76 68 13.6 2.8 2.5 683 717 225 234
3000 2270 87 78 15.1 3.2 3.0 900 940 267 277
5000 3580 104 92 17.1 3.9 3.6 1270 1320 332 344
7000 4830 117 103 18.6 4.5 4.1 1600 1650 383 396
Passenger
10000 6640 133 116 20.4 5.0 4.8 2040 2090 446 459
(cruise) ship
15000 9530 153 132 22.5 5.9 5.6 2690 2740 530 545
20000 12300 169 146 24.2 5.2 7.6 3270 3320 599 614
30000 17700 194 166 26.8 7.3 7.6 4310 4350 712 728
50000 27900 231 197 30.5 10.6 7.6 6090 6120 880 900
70000 37600 260 220 33.1 13.1 7.6 7660 7660 1020 1040
1000 810 59 54 12.7 1.9 2.7 387 404 141 145
2000 1600 76 69 15.1 2.5 3.3 617 646 196 203
3000 2390 88 80 16.7 2.8 3.7 811 851 237 247
5000 3940 106 97 19.0 3.3 4.3 1150 1200 302 316
7000 5480 119 110 20.6 3.7 4.8 1440 1510 354 372
Ferry
10000 7770 135 125 22.6 4.2 5.3 1830 1930 419 442
15000 11600 157 145 25.0 4.7 6.0 2400 2540 508 537
20000 15300 174 162 26.8 5.2 6.5 2920 3090 582 618
30000 22800 201 188 29.7 5.9 7.4 3830 4070 705 752
40000 30300 223 209 31.9 6.5 8.0 4660 4940 810 860
1000 2210 68 63 11.1 1.0 4.3 350 436 121 139
2000 4080 84 78 13.7 1.6 5.2 535 662 177 203
3000 5830 95 89 15.4 2.0 5.8 686 846 222 254
5000 9100 112 104 17.9 2.7 6.7 940 1150 295 335
7000 12300 124 116 19.8 3.2 7.4 1150 1410 355 403
10000 16900 138 130 22.0 3.8 8.2 1430 1750 432 490
Gas carrier
15000 24100 157 147 24.8 4.6 9.3 1840 2240 541 612
20000 31100 171 161 27.1 5.4 10.0 2190 2660 634 716
30000 44400 194 183 30.5 6.1 11.7 2810 3400 794 894
50000 69700 227 216 35.5 9.6 11.7 3850 4630 1050 1180
70000 94000 252 240 39.3 12.3 11.7 4730 5670 1270 1420
100000 128000 282 268 43.7 15.6 11.7 5880 7030 1550 1730

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–16

75%

SHIP TABLES
smaller larger

Wind area
Displacement
Type DWT/GRT LOA LBP B FL DL Lateral Front
M75
Full Load Ballast Full Load Ballast
1000 1690 67 62 10.8 1.9 3.9 278 342 63 93
2000 3250 83 77 13.1 2.3 4.9 426 541 101 142
3000 4750 95 88 14.7 2.5 5.6 547 708 132 182
5000 7690 111 104 16.9 2.8 6.6 750 993 185 249
General 7000 10600 123 115 18.6 3.0 7.4 922 1240 232 307
cargo ship 10000 14800 137 129 20.5 3.3 8.3 1150 1570 294 382
15000 21600 156 147 23.0 3.6 9.5 1480 2060 385 490
20000 28400 170 161 24.9 3.9 10.4 1760 2490 466 585
30000 41600 193 183 27.8 4.3 11.9 2260 3250 611 750
40000 54500 211 200 30.2 4.6 13.0 2700 3940 740 895
5000 6920 109 101 15.5 2.4 6.2 689 910 221 245
7000 9520 120 111 17.2 2.6 6.9 795 1090 250 287
10000 13300 132 124 19.2 2.9 7.7 930 1320 286 340
15000 19600 149 140 21.8 3.3 8.6 1100 1630 332 411
20000 25700 161 152 23.8 3.6 9.4 1240 1900 369 470
30000 37700 181 172 27.0 4.1 10.6 1480 2360 428 569
Bulk carrier
50000 61100 209 200 32.3 4.7 12.4 1830 3090 518 723
70000 84000 231 221 32.3 5.2 13.7 2110 3690 586 846
100000 118000 255 246 39.2 5.9 15.2 2460 4460 669 1000
150000 173000 287 278 44.5 6.7 17.1 2920 5520 777 1210
200000 227000 311 303 48.7 7.3 18.6 3300 6430 864 1380
250000 280000 332 324 52.2 7.8 19.9 3630 7240 938 1540
7000 10700 123 115 20.3 2.6 7.2 1460 1590 330 444
10000 15100 141 132 22.4 3.3 8.0 1880 1990 410 535
15000 22200 166 156 25.0 4.3 9.0 2490 2560 524 663
20000 29200 186 175 27.1 5.0 9.9 3050 3070 625 771
Container 25000 36100 203 191 28.8 5.7 10.6 3570 3520 716 870
ship
30000 43000 218 205 30.2 6.4 11.1 4060 3950 800 950
40000 56500 244 231 32.3 7.4 12.2 4970 4730 950 1110
50000 69900 266 252 32.3 8.4 13.0 5810 5430 1090 1250
60000 83200 286 271 36.5 9.2 13.8 6610 6090 1220 1370
1000 1580 61 58 10.2 0.5 4.0 190 280 86 85
2000 3070 76 72 12.6 0.8 4.9 280 422 119 125
3000 4520 87 82 14.3 1.1 5.5 351 536 144 156
5000 7360 102 97 16.8 1.5 6.4 467 726 184 207
7000 10200 114 108 18.6 1.8 7.1 564 885 216 249
10000 14300 127 121 20.8 2.1 7.9 688 1090 255 303
15000 21000 144 138 23.6 2.7 8.9 860 1390 309 378
Oil tanker 20000 27700 158 151 25.8 3.2 9.6 1010 1650 355 443
30000 40800 180 173 29.2 3.9 10.9 1270 2090 430 554
50000 66400 211 204 32.3 5.0 12.6 1690 2830 548 734
70000 91600 235 227 38.0 6.0 13.9 2040 3460 642 884
100000 129000 263 254 42.5 7.1 15.4 2490 4270 761 1080
150000 190000 298 290 48.1 8.5 17.4 3120 5430 920 1340
200000 250000 327 318 42.6 9.8 18.9 3670 6430 1060 1570
300000 368000 371 363 59.7 11.9 21.2 4600 8180 1280 1970

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–17

75%

SHIP TABLES
smaller larger

Wind area
Displacement
Type DWT/GRT LOA LBP B FL DL Lateral Front
M75
Full Load Ballast Full Load Ballast
1000 2190 73 66 14.0 2.7 3.5 880 970 232 232
2000 4150 94 86 16.6 3.9 4.5 1210 1320 314 323
3000 6030 109 99 18.3 4.7 5.3 1460 1590 374 391
5000 9670 131 120 20.7 6.1 6.4 1850 2010 467 497
RoRo ship 7000 13200 148 136 22.5 7.3 7.2 2170 2350 541 583
10000 18300 169 155 24.6 8.8 8.2 2560 2760 632 690
15000 26700 196 180 27.2 10.7 9.6 3090 3320 754 836
20000 34800 218 201 29.1 12.4 10.7 3530 3780 854 960
30000 50600 252 233 32.2 15.2 12.4 4260 4550 1020 1160
1000 1030 64 60 12.1 2.3 2.6 464 486 187 197
2000 1910 81 75 14.4 2.9 3.4 744 770 251 263
3000 2740 93 86 16.0 3.4 4.0 980 1010 298 311
5000 4320 112 102 18.2 4.2 4.8 1390 1420 371 386
7000 5830 125 114 19.8 4.7 5.5 1740 1780 428 444
Passenger 10000 8010 142 128 21.6 5.3 6.4 2220 2250 498 516
(cruise) ship
15000 11500 163 146 23.9 6.2 7.5 2930 2950 592 611
20000 14900 180 160 25.7 7.3 8.0 3560 3570 669 690
30000 21300 207 183 28.4 9.8 8.0 4690 4680 795 818
50000 33600 248 217 32.3 13.7 8.0 6640 6580 990 1010
70000 45300 278 243 35.2 16.6 8.0 8350 8230 1140 1170
1000 1230 67 61 14.3 2.1 3.4 411 428 154 158
2000 2430 86 78 17.0 2.6 4.2 656 685 214 221
3000 3620 99 91 18.8 2.9 4.8 862 903 259 269
5000 5970 119 110 21.4 3.5 5.5 1220 1280 330 344
7000 8310 134 124 23.2 3.9 6.1 1530 1600 387 405
Ferry
10000 11800 153 142 25.4 4.3 6.8 1940 2040 458 482
15000 17500 177 164 28.1 5.0 7.6 2550 2690 555 586
20000 23300 196 183 30.2 5.5 8.3 3100 3270 636 673
30000 34600 227 212 33.4 6.2 9.4 4070 4310 771 819
40000 45900 252 236 35.9 6.9 10.2 4950 5240 880 940
1000 2480 71 66 11.7 1.1 4.6 390 465 133 150
2000 4560 88 82 14.3 1.5 5.7 597 707 195 219
3000 6530 100 93 16.1 2.0 6.4 765 903 244 273
5000 10200 117 109 18.8 2.6 7.4 1050 1230 323 361
7000 13800 129 121 20.8 3.2 8.1 1290 1510 389 434
10000 18900 144 136 23.1 3.9 9.0 1600 1870 474 527
Gas carrier
15000 27000 164 154 26.0 4.8 10.1 2050 2390 593 658
20000 34800 179 169 28.4 5.5 11.0 2450 2840 696 770
30000 49700 203 192 32.0 6.7 12.3 3140 3630 870 961
50000 78000 237 226 37.2 10.5 12.3 4290 4940 1150 1270
70000 105000 263 251 41.2 13.4 12.3 5270 6050 1390 1530
100000 144000 294 281 45.8 16.9 12.3 6560 7510 1690 1860

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–18

APPROACH VELOCITY (VB)


Berthing speeds depend on the ease or difficulty of the approach, the exposure of the berth and the vessel’s size.
Conditions are normally divided into five categories as shown in the chart’s key table.
The most widely used guide to approach speeds is the Brolsma table, adopted by BS1, PIANC2 and other standards.
For ease of use, speeds for the main vessel sizes are shown at the bottom of this page.

0.8
Berthing condition
a Easy berthing, sheltered
0.7
b Difficult berthing, sheltered
e VB c Easy berthing, exposed
d Good berthing, exposed
0.6
Approach velocity, VB (m/s)

e Difficult berthing, exposed

d
0.5

0.4 c
most commonly
used conditions
0.3
b

0.2

a
0.1
USE WITH CAUTION
0
1,000 10,000 100,000 500,000
Deadweight (DWT)*

* PIANC suggests using DWT from 50% or 75% confidence limit ship tables.

Velocity, VB (m/s)
DWT a b c d e B Approach velocities less than
1,000 0.179 0.343 0.517 0.669 0.865 0.1m/s should be used with
caution.
2,000 0.151 0.296 0.445 0.577 0.726
B Values are for tug-assisted
3,000 0.136 0.269 0.404 0.524 0.649
berthing.
4,000 0.125 0.250 0.374 0.487 0.597
B Spreadsheets for calculating the
5,000 0.117 0.236 0.352 0.459 0.558
approach velocity and berthing
10,000 0.094 0.192 0.287 0.377 0.448
energy are available at
20,000 0.074 0.153 0.228 0.303 0.355
www.trelleborg.com/marine .
30,000 0.064 0.133 0.198 0.264 0.308
B Actual berthing velocities can be
40,000 0.057 0.119 0.178 0.239 0.279 measured, displayed and recorded
50,000 0.052 0.110 0.164 0.221 0.258 using a SmartDock Docking Aid
100,000 0.039 0.083 0.126 0.171 0.201 System (DAS) by Harbour Marine.†
200,000 0.028 0.062 0.095 0.131 0.158
300,000 0.022 0.052 0.080 0.111 0.137 † Harbour Marine is part of
400,000 0.019 0.045 0.071 0.099 0.124 Trelleborg Marine Systems.
500,000 0.017 0.041 0.064 0.090 0.115
Caution: low berthing speeds are easily exceeded.

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–19

BLOCK COEFFICIENT (CB)


The block coefficient (CB) is a function of the hull shape and is expressed as follows:

MD Typical block coefficients (CB)


CB =
LBP × B × D × ρSW Container vessels 0.6–0.8
General cargo and bulk carriers 0.72–0.85
Tankers 0.85
where, Ferries 0.55–0.65
MD = displacement of vessel (t) RoRo vessels 0.7–0.8
LBP = length between perpendiculars (m) Source: PIANC 2002; Table 4.2.2
B = beam (m)
D = draft (m)
ρSW = seawater density ≈ 1.025t/m3

D LBP
Given ship dimensions and using typical block coefficients,
the displacement can be estimated:

MD ≈ CB × LBP × B × D × ρSW B

ADDED MASS COEFFICIENT (CM)


B
The added mass coefficient allows for the body of water carried Quay
along with the ship as it moves sideways through the water. As
the ship is stopped by the fender, the entrained water continues
to push against the ship, effectively increasing its overall mass. VB D
The Vasco Costa method is adopted by most design codes for
KC
ship-to-shore berthing where water depths are not substantially
greater than vessel drafts.

Shigera Ueda Vasco Costa*


PIANC (2002) (1981) (1964)

KC
for ≤ 0.1 CM = 1.8
D
where,
KC KC π×D 2D
for 0.1 ≤ ≤ 0.5 CM = 1.875 – 0.75 CM = CM = 1 + D = draft of vessel (m)
D D 2 × CB × B B B = beam of vessel (m)
KC LBP = length between
for ≥ 0.5 CM = 1.5 perpendiculars (m)
D
KC = under keel clearance (m)
* valid where VB ≥ 0.08m/s, KC ≥ 0.1D

Special case – longitudinal approach

V CM = 1.1
Recommended by PIANC.

12–19
12–20

ECCENTRICITY COEFFICIENT (CE)

The Eccentricity Coefficient allows


LBP for the energy dissipated by rotation
of the ship about its point of impact
y
x with the fenders. The correct point of
B impact, berthing angle and velocity
2 vector angle are all important
R ϕ
α for accurate calculation of the
berthing line eccentricity coefficient.
VB In practice, CE often varies
V between 0.3 and 1.0 for different
VL
berthing cases.
VL = longitudinal velocity component (forward or astern) Velocity (V) is not always
perpendicular to the berthing line.

LBP
x+y= (assuming the centre of mass is at mid-length of the ship)
2

B
2 Common berthing cases
R= y2 +
2
Quarter-point berthing
K = (0.19 × CB + 0.11) × LBP
LBP
x= CE ≈ 0.4–0.6
4
K + R cos ϕ
2 2 2

CE = Third-point berthing
K2 + R2
LBP
x= CE ≈ 0.6–0.8
3
where,
B = beam (m)
CB = block coefficient Midships berthing
LBP = length between perpendiculars (m)
LBP
R = centre of mass to point of impact (m) x= CE ≈ 1.0
2
K = radius of gyration (m)

Caution: for ϕ < 10º, CE J 1.0

Lock entrances and guiding fenders Dolphin berths


Tug
ϕ ϕ α
V R
R
α
V
a

Where the ship has a significant forward motion, PIANC Ships rarely berth exactly midway between dolphins.
suggests that the ship’s speed parallel to the berthing ROM 0.2-90 suggests a=0.1L, with a minimum of 10m
face (Vcosα) is not decreased by berthing impacts, and and maximum of 15m between the midpoint and the
it is the transverse velocity component (Vsinα) which vessel’s centre of mass. This offset reduces the vector
much be resisted by the fenders. When calculating the angle (ϕ) and increases the eccentricity coefficient.
eccentricity coefficient, the velocity vector angle (ϕ) is
taken between V and R.

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–21

ECCENTRICITY COEFFICIENT (CE)

Special cases for RoRo Terminals


Modern RoRo terminals commonly use two different approach modes during berthing. PIANC defines these as mode b)
and mode c). It is important to decide whether one or both approach modes will be used, as the berthing energies which
must be absorbed by the fenders can differ considerably.

Mode b) Mode c)

α ≤ 15º Outer end


Breasting
A
dolphins

A
R V1 Breasting
≤0.25LS dolphins
R
Approach ϕ
ϕ
V1
≤0.25LS ≥ 1.05LL

V2
α ≤ 15º V2 ≤0.25LS B

≤0.25LS
Inner end

V3 V3 α
≤0.25LS ≤0.25LS

C C
End fender and End fender and
shore based ramp shore based ramp

Fender Typical values Fender Typical values


A Side 100mm/s ≤ V1 ≤ 300mm/s 60° ≤ ϕ ≤ 90° A Side 1000mm/s ≤ V1 ≤ 3000mm/s 0° ≤ ϕ ≤ 50°
B Side 300mm/s ≤ V2 ≤ 500mm/s N/A B Side 500mm/s ≤ V2 ≤ 1000mm/s 0° ≤ ϕ ≤ 50°
C End 200mm/s ≤ V3 ≤ 500mm/s 0° ≤ ϕ ≤ 10° C End 200mm/s ≤ V3 ≤ 500mm/s 0° ≤ ϕ ≤ 10°

RoRo vessels with bow and/or stern ramps make a RoRo vessels approach either head-on or stern-on with a
transverse approach to the berth. The ships then move large longitudinal velocity. Side fenders guide the vessel
along the quay or dolphins using the side fenders for but ships berth directly against the shore ramp structure
guidance until they are the required distance from the or dedicated end fenders.
shore ramp structure. B Quicker berthing and more controllable in strong winds
B Lower berthing energy B High berthing energies
B Reduced speeds may affect ship manoeuvrability B Risk of vessel hitting inside of fenders or even the
B Increased turn-around time dolphins
B CE is smaller (typically 0.4–0.7) B CE can be large (typically 0.6–0.9)

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–22

BERTH CONFIGURATION COEFFICIENT (CC)

When ships berth at small angles against solid Closed structure


structures, the water between hull and quay acts as
a cushion and dissipates a small part of the berthing
energy. The extent to which this factor contributes will
depend upon several factors:

B Quay structure design


B Underkeel clearance
B Velocity and angle of approach
B Projection of fender
B Vessel hull shape
Semi-closed structure
PIANC recommends the following values:

B Open structures including berth corners


B Berthing angles > 5º
CC = 1.0
B Very low berthing velocities
B Large underkeel clearance

B Solid quay structures


CC = 0.9
B Berthing angles > 5º

Note: where the under keel clearance has already been


considered for added mass (CM), the berth configuration
coefficient CC =1 is usually assumed.

SOFTNESS COEFFICIENT (CS)


Where fenders are hard relative to the flexibility of the ship hull, some of the berthing energy is absorbed by elastic
deformation of the hull. In most cases this contribution is limited and ignored (CS =1). PIANC recommends the following
values:

CS = 1.0 Soft fenders (δf > 150mm)

CS = 0.9 Hard fenders (δf ≤ 150mm)

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–23

FENDER SELECTION

Every type and size of fender


has different performance
characteristics. Whatever type of
fenders are used, they must have
sufficient capacity to absorb the
normal and abnormal energies of
berthing ships.
When selecting fenders the
designer must consider many factors
including: Reaction
B Single or multiple fender contacts ENERGY
B The effects of angular compressions
= area under curve
B Approach speeds
B Extremes of temperature
B Berthing frequency
B Fender efficiency

Deflection

Comparing efficiency
Fender efficiency is defined as the
ratio of the energy absorbed to
the reaction force generated. This
method allows fenders of many sizes R R
and types to be compared as the
example shows.
Comparisons should also be made
at other compression angles, speeds E E
and temperatures when applicable.

D D

Super Cone SeaGuard


SCN 1050 (E2) SG 2000 × 3500 (STD)
E = 458kNm E = 454kNm
This comparison shows Super R = 843kN R = 845kN
Cone and SeaGuard fenders D = 768mm D = 1200mm
with similar energy, reaction P = 187kN/m2 * P = 172kN/m2
and hull pressure, but different
height, deflection and initial
E E
stiffness (curve gradient). = 0.543 kNm/kN = 0.537 kNm/kN
R R

* for a 4.5m2 panel

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–24

FENDER PITCH

Fenders spaced too far apart may

s, RB
allow ships to hit the structure.
A positive clearance (C)

Bow radiu
should always be maintained,
usually between 5–15% of the
uncompressed fender height (H).
A minimum clearance of 300mm
inclusive of bow flare is commonly
specified.
α
B Smaller ships have smaller bow
radius but usually cause smaller
fender deflection.
B Clearance distances should take
account of bow flare angles.
θ θ
B Bow flares are greater near to h = H – δF
the bow and stern.
B Where ship drawings are
available, these should be used H δF θ
C h
to estimate bow radius.

P P/ P/
2 2

Bow radius Fender pitch

As a guide to suitable distance between fenders on a continuous wharf, the


1 B LOA2
RB ≈ + formula below indicates the maximum fender pitch. Small, intermediate and
2 2 8B large vessels should be checked.

where,
P ≤ 2 RB2 – (RB – h + C)2
RB = bow radius (m)
B = beam of vessel (m) where,
LOA = vessel length overall (m) P = pitch of fender
RB = bow radius (m)
The bow radius formula is h = fender projection when compressed, measured at centreline of fender
approximate and should be checked a = berthing angle
against actual ship dimensions C = clearance between vessel and dock (C should be 5–15% of the
where possible. undeflected fender projection, including panel)
θ = hull contact angle with fender
According to BS 6349: Part 4: 1994, it is also recommended that the fender
spacing does not exceed 0.15 × L S, where L S is the length of the smallest ship.

Cruise liner Container ship Bulk carrier/


Bow radius (metres)

Caution 200 general cargo

Large fender spacings 150

may work in theory but 100


in practice a maximum 50
spacing of 12–15m is more
0
realistic. 0 65 0 140 0 425
Displacement (1000 t) Displacement (1000 t) Displacement (1000 t)

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–25

MULTIPLE CONTACT CASES


3-fender contact 2-fender contact

RB RB RB RB

δF2 δF1 δF2 δF


Berthing Berthing
H line line

P P P
P P/ P/ P
2 2

B Energy absorbed by three (or more) fenders B Energy divided over 2 (or more) fenders
B Larger fender deflection likely B Smaller fender deflections
B Bow flare is important B Greater total reaction into structure
B 1-fender contact also possible for ships with small B Clearance depends on bow radius and bow flare
bow radius

ANGULAR BERTHING
The berthing angle between the fender and the ship’s hull may result in some loss of energy absorption. Angular berthing
means the horizontal and/or vertical angle between the ship’s hull and the berthing structure at the point of contact.
There are three possible conditions for the effects of angular berthing: flare, bow radius and dolphin.

Flare Bow radius Dolphin

α
Bow
radi
us,
RB

α
θ
β
P

P
sin θ = where RB = bow radius
2RB

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–26

FENDER PANEL DESIGN

Fender panels are used to


distribute reaction forces into 3 design cases
the hulls of berthing vessels.
The panel design should
consider many factors including: Full-face contact Low-level impact Double contact

B Hull pressures and tidal range n×T


B Lead-in bevels and chamfers F F1
B Bending moment and shear
B Local buckling
B Limit state load factors R R R1
B Steel grade
B Permissible stresses
B Weld sizes and types
B Effects of fatigue and cyclic
loads
F R2
B Pressure test method
B Rubber fender connections
B UHMW-PE attachment
B Chain connections F2
B Lifting points
B Paint systems
B Corrosion allowance
B Maintenance and service life

Steel Properties
PIANC steel thicknesses
Yield Strength (min) Tensile Strength (min) Temperature
Standard Grade
N/mm² psi N/mm² psi °C °F PIANC recommends the following
S235JR minimum steel thicknesses for
235 34 000 360 52 000 – –
(1.0038)
fender panel construction:
S275JR 275 40 000 420 61 000 – –
(1.0044)
EN 10025 Exposed both faces ≥ 12mm
S355J2 355 51 000 510 74 000 -20 -4 Exposed one face ≥ 9mm
(1.0570)
S355J0 Internal (not exposed) ≥ 8mm
355 51 000 510 74 000 0 32
(1.0553) Source: PIANC 2002; Section 4.1.6.
SS41 235 34 000 402 58 000 0 32 Corresponding minimum panel thickness
will be 140–160mm (excluding UHMW-PE
JIS G-3101 SS50 275 40 000 402 58 000 0 32
face pads) and often much greater.
SM50 314 46 000 490 71 000 0 32
Typical panel weights
A-36 250 36 000 400 58 000 0 32
ASTM
The table can be used as a guide
A-572 345 50 000 450 65 000 0 32
to minimum average panel weight
The national standards of France and Germany have been replaced by EN 10025. In the (excluding UHMW-PE face pads) for
UK, BS4360 has been replaced by BS EN 10025. The table above is for guidance only different service conditions:
and is not comprehensive. Actual specifications should be consulted in all cases for the
full specifications of steel grades listed and other similar grades. Light duty 200–250kg/m2
Medium duty 250–300kg/m2
Heavy duty 300–400kg/m2
Extreme duty ≥400kg/m2

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–27

HULL PRESSURES
W Allowable hull pressures depend on hull plate thickness and frame spacing.
These vary according to the type of ship. PIANC gives the following advice on
hull pressures:

Hull pressure
Vessel type Size/class (kN/m2)
R < 1 000 teu (1st/2nd generation) < 400
H P= < 3 000 teu (3rd generation) < 300
Container ships
W×H < 8 000 teu (4th generation) < 250
> 8 000 teu (5th/6th generation) < 200
≤ 20 000 DWT 400–700
General cargo > 20 000 DWT < 400
≤ 20 000 DWT < 250
Oil tankers ≤ 60 000 DWT < 300
> 60 000 DWT 150–200
Gas carriers LNG/LPG < 200
P = average hull pressure (kN/m2) Bulk carriers < 200
R = total fender reaction (kN) RoRo Usually fitted with
W = panel width, excluding bevels (m) Passenger/cruise beltings (strakes)
SWATH
H = panel height, excluding bevels (m)
Source: PIANC 2002; Table 4.4.1

BELTINGS Belting types

Most ships have beltings (sometimes called belts or


strakes). These come in many shapes and sizes – some
are well-designed, others can be poorly maintained or 1 2
modified.
Care is needed when designing fender panels to cope
with beltings and prevent snagging or catching which may
damage the system.
Belting line loads exert crushing forces on the fender
panel which must be considered in the structural design.

Application Vessels Belting Load (kN/m) h


Light duty Aluminium hulls 150–300
Medium duty Container 500–1 000 3

Heavy duty RoRo/Cruise 1 000–1 500


≥h

Belting range is
often greater than
Belting tidal range due
range to ship design,
heave, roll, and
changes in draft. 1 2 Common on RoRo/Cruise ships.
Projection 200–400mm (typical).

3 Common on LNG/Oil tankers, barges, offshore


supply vessels and some container ships.
Projection 100–250mm (typical).

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–28

FRICTION

Friction has a large influence on the fender design, particularly for Typical friction design values
restraint chains. Low friction facing materials (UHMW-PE) are often
used to reduce friction. Other materials, like polyurethanes (PU) used Materials Friction Coefficient (μ)
for the skin of foam fenders, have lower friction coefficients than UHMW-PE Steel 0.2
rubber against steel or concrete. HD-PE Steel 0.3
The table can be used as a guide to typical design values. Friction Polyurethane Steel 0.4
coefficients may vary due to wet or dry conditions, local temperatures, Rubber Steel 0.7
static and dynamic load cases, as well as surface roughness. Timber Steel 0.4
Steel Steel 0.5

CHAIN DESIGN
Chains can be used to restrain the movements of fenders
during compression or to support static loads. Chains
may serve four main functions:

B Weight chains support the steel panel and prevent


excessive drooping of the system. They may also resist
vertical shear forces caused by ship movements or
changing draft.
B Shear chains resist horizontal forces caused during
longitudinal approaches or warping operations.
B Tension chains restrict tension on the fender rubber.
Correct location can optimise the deflection geometry.
B Keep chains are used to moor floating fenders or to 1
prevent loss of fixed fenders in the event of accidents.
3
Factors to be considered when designing fender chains:

B Corrosion reduces link diameter and weakens the chain.


B Corrosion allowances and periodic replacement should 2
be allowed for.
B A ‘weak link’ in the chain system is desirable to prevent
damage to more costly components in an accident.

μR + W
SWL =
n cosθ

MBL ≥ FC × SWL
θ

where,
SWL = safe working load (kN) μR
FC = safety factor
μ = coefficient of friction 1 Tension chains
R = fender reaction (kN)
W = gross panel weight (kg) 2 Weight chains
(for shear chains, W = 0) W
n = number of chains 3 Shear chains
θ = effective chain angle (degrees)

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–29

UHMW-PE FACING

The contact face of a fender panel Fastening example


helps to determine the lifetime
maintenance costs of a fender
installation. UHMW-PE (FQ1000) is W
the best material available for such
t
applications. It uniquely combines
low friction, impact strength, Always use oversize washers
non-marking characteristics and to spread the load.
resistance to wear, temperature
extremes, seawater and marine
borers.
Sinter moulded into plates at Application t (mm) W* (mm) Bolt
extremely high pressure, UHMW-PE
Light duty 30 3–5 M16
is a totally homogeneous material
40 7–10
which is available in many sizes and Medium duty M16–M20
50 10–15
thicknesses. These plates can be
60 15–19
cut, machined and drilled to suit any
Heavy duty 70 18–25 M24–M30
type of panel or shield.
80 22–32
90 25–36
Extreme duty M30–M36
100 28–40
* Where allowances are typical values, actual wear allowance may vary due fixing detail.

The standard colour is black, but


UHMW-PE is available in many other
colours if required. Large pads vs small pads

Larger pads
are usually
more robust
but smaller
pads are easier
and cheaper to
replace.

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–30

CORROSION PREVENTION

Fenders are usually installed in corrosive


environments, sometimes made worse by high
temperature and humidity. Corrosion of fender
accessories can be reduced with specialist paint
coatings, by galvanising or with selective use of
stainless steels.
Paint coatings and galvanising have a finite life.
Coating must be reapplied at intervals during the life
of the fender. Galvanised components like chains or
bolts may need periodic re-galvanising or replacement.
Stainless steels should be carefully selected for their
performance in seawater.

Paint coatings
ISO EN 12944 is a widely used international standard defining the durability of corrosion protection systems in various
environments. The C5-M class applies to marine coastal, offshore and high salinity locations and is considered to be the
most applicable to fenders.
The life expectancy or ‘durability’ of coatings is divided into three categories which estimate the time to first major
maintenance:

Low 2–5 years


Durability range is not a guarantee. It is to help
Medium 5–15 years
operators estimate sensible maintenance times.
High >15 years

The table gives some typical C5-M class paint systems which provide high durability in marine environments. Note that
coal tar epoxy paints are not available in some countries.

Paint Surface Priming Coat(s) Top Coats Paint System Expected durability
System Preparation Binder Primer No. coats NDFT Binder No. coats NDFT No. coats NDFT (C5-M corrosivity)

S7.09 Sa 2.5 EP, PUR Zn (R) 1 40 EP, PUR 3-4 280 4-5 320 High (>15y)
S7.11 Sa 2.5 EP, PUR Zn (R) 1 40 CTE 3 360 4 400 High (>15y)
S7.16 Sa 2.5 CTE Misc 1 100 CTE 2 200 3 300 Medium (5-15y)

Sa 2.5 is defined in ISO 8501-1 Misc = miscellaneous types of PUR = 1-pack or 2-pack polyurethane
NDFT = Nominal dry film thickness anticorrosive pigments CTE = 2-pack coal tar epoxy
Zn (R) = Zinc rich primer EP = 2-pack epoxy

Design considerations

Other paint systems may also satisfy the C5-M requirements but in choosing any coating the designer should carefully
consider the following:

B Corrosion protection systems are not a substitute for poor design details such as re-entrant shapes and corrosion traps.
B Minimum dry film thickness >80% of NDFT (typical)
B Maximum film thickness <3 × NDFT (typical)
B Local legislation on emission of solvents or health & safety factors
B Application temperatures, drying and handling times
B Maximum over-coating times
B Local conditions including humidity or contaminants

Refer to paint manufacturer for advice on specific applications and products.

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–31

CORROSION PREVENTION

Galvanising
Hot-dip galvanising is the process of coating steel parts with a
zinc layer by passing the component through a bath of molten
zinc. When exposed to sea water the zinc acts as an anodic
reservoir which protects the steel underneath. Once the zinc is
depleted the steel will begin to corrode and lose strength.
Galvanising thickness can be increased by:

B shot blasting the components before dipping


B pickling the components in acid
B double dipping the components (only suitable for some steel
grades)

Spin galvanising is used for threaded components which are


immersed in molten zinc then immediately centrifuged to
remove any excess zinc and clear the threads. Spin galvanised
coatings are thinner than hot dip galvanised coatings and will
not last as long in marine environments.
Typical galvanising thicknesses:

Hot dip galvanising 85μm


Spin galvanising 40μm

Stainless steels
Pitting Resistance Galling

Stainless steel performance in seawater varies according Galling or ‘cold welding’ affects threaded stainless
to pitting resistance. Chemical composition – especially steel components including nuts, bolts and anchors.
Chromium (Cr), Molybdenum (Mo) and Nitrogen (N) The protective oxide layer of the stainless steel gets
content – is a major factor in pitting resistance. scraped off during tightening causing high local friction
The pitting resistance equivalent number (PREN) is a and welding of the threads. After galling, seized fasteners
theoretical way to compare stainless steel grades. The cannot be further tightened or removed and usually needs
most common formula for PREN is: to be cut out and replaced.
To avoid this problem, always apply anti-galling
PREN = Cr + 3.3Mo + 16N compounds to threads before assembly. If these are
unavailable then molybdenum disulfide or PTFE based
lubricants can be used.
Cr and Mo are major cost factors for stainless steel.
A high PREN material will usually last longer but cost
more.

Common
Grade Type Cr (%) Mo (%) N (%) PREN Comments
Name
1.4501 Zeron 100 Duplex 24.0–26.0 3.0– 4.0 0.2–0.3 37.1–44.0 used where very long service life is needed
1.4462 SAF 2205 Duplex 21.0–23.0 2.5–3.5 0.1–0.22 30.9–38.1 or access for inspection is difficult
1.4401 316S31 Austenitic 16.5–18.5 2.0–2.5 0–0.11 23.1–28.5 widely used for fender fixings
1.4301 304 Austenitic 17.0–19.5 – 0–0.11 17.0–21.3
unsuitable for most fender applications
1.4003 3CR12 Ferritic 10.5–12.5 – 0–0.03 10.5–13.0
Percentages of Cr, Mo and N are typical mid-range values and may differ within permissible limits for each grade.
Source: British Stainless Steel Association (www.bssa.org.uk).

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–32

PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

PROJECT DETAILS PROJECT STATUS

Port TMS Ref:

Project Preliminary
Designer Detail design
Contractor Tender

LBP
LOA B

LARGEST VESSEL SMALLEST VESSEL

Vessel type Vessel type

Deadweight (t) Deadweight (t)

Displacement (t) Displacement (t)

Length overall (LOA) (m) Length overall (LOA) (m)

Length between perps (LBP) (m) Length between perps (LBP) (m)

Beam (B) (m) Beam (B) (m)

Draft (D) (m) Draft (D) (m)

Freeboard (F) (m) Freeboard (F) (m)

Hull pressure (P) (t/m2) Hull pressure (P) (t/m2)

BERTH DETAILS

Closed structure Semi-open structure Open structure Other (please describe)

Structure Tide levels

Length of berth (m) Tidal range (m)

Fender/dolphin spacing (m) Highest astronomic tide (HAT) (m)

Permitted fender reaction (kN/m) Mean high water spring (MHWS) (m)

Quay level (m) Mean sea level (MSL) (m)

Cope thickness (m) Mean low water spring (MLWS) (m)

Seabed level (m) Lowest astronomic tide (LAT) (m)

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–33

PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

BERTHING MODE BERTHING APPROACH

Approach conditions
Side berthing a) easy berthing, sheltered
b) difficult berthing, sheltered
c) easy berthing, exposed
Dolphin berthing
d) good berthing, exposed
incl. RoRo mode b)
e) difficult berthing, exposed

Largest ship
End berthing
Berthing speed (m/s)

Berthing angle (deg)


Lock or dock entrance
Abnormal impact factor

Smallest ship
Ship-to-ship berthing
Berthing speed (m/s)

Berthing angle (deg)


RoRo mode c)
Abnormal impact factor

ENVIRONMENT QUALITY SAFETY

Operating temperature Highest quality Maximum safety

Minimum ___________________________________ (°C)

Maximum __________________________________ (°C)

Corrosivity

low medium high extreme Lowest price Not safety-critical

FURTHER DETAILS AVAILABLE FROM

Name Tel

Company Fax

Position Mobile

Address Email

Web

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN

© Trelleborg AB, 2008


12–34

RUBBER PROPERTIES
All Trelleborg rubber fenders are made using the highest quality Natural Rubber (NR) or Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR)
based compounds which meet or exceed the performance requirements of international fender recommendations,
such as PIANC and EAU. Trelleborg can also make fenders from other NR/SBR compounds or from materials such as
Neoprene, Butyl Rubber, EPDM and Polyurethane.
Different manufacturing processes such as moulding, wrapping and extrusion require certain characteristics from the
rubber. The tables below give usual physical properties for fenders made by these processes which are confirmed during
quality assurance testing.* All test results are from laboratory made and cured test pieces. Results from samples taken
from actual fenders will differ due to the sample preparation process – please ask for details.

Moulded fenders

Property Testing Standard Condition Requirement


DIN 53504; ASTM D 412 Die C; AS 1180.2; Original 16.0 MPa (min)
Tensile Strength BS ISO 37; JIS K 6251 Aged for 96 hours at 70ºC 12.8 MPa (min)

DIN 53504; ASTM D 412 Die C; AS 1180.2; Original 350%


Elongation at Break BS ISO 37; JIS K 6251 Aged for 96 hours at 70ºC 280%

DIN 53505; ASTM D 2240; Original 78° Shore A (max)


Hardness
AS1683.15.2; JIS K 6253 Aged for 96 hours at 70ºC Original +8° Shore A (max)
ASTM D 395 Method B; AS 1683.13 Method B;
Compression Set 22 hours at 70°C 30% (max)
BS903 A6; ISO 815; JIS K 6262
ASTM D 624 Die B; AS 1683.12;
Tear Resistance Original 70kN/m (min)
BS ISO 34-1; JIS K 6252
DIN 53509; ASTM D 1149; AS 1683-24; 50pphm at 20% strain,
Ozone Resistance No cracks
BS ISO 1431-1; JIS K 6259 40°C, 100 hours
Hardness: ±10° Shore A (max)
Seawater Resistance BS ISO 1817; ASTM D 471 28 days at 95°C Volume: +10/-5% (max)
ASTM D5963-04; BS ISO 4649 : 2002 Original 100mm3 (max)
Abrasion
BS903 A9, Method B 3000 revolutions 1.5cc (max)
Bond Strength ASTM D429, Method B; BS 903.A21 Section 21.1 Rubber to steel 7N/mm (min)
Dynamic Fatigue† ASTM D430-95, Method B 15,000 cycles Grade 0–1‡

Extruded and wrapped fenders

Property Testing Standard Condition Requirement


DIN 53504; ASTM D 412 Die C; AS 1180.2; Original 13.0 MPa (min)
Tensile Strength BS ISO 37; JIS K 6251 Aged for 96 hours at 70ºC 10.4 MPa (min)

DIN 53504; ASTM D 412 Die C; AS 1180.2; Original 280% (min)


Elongation at Break BS ISO 37; JIS K 6251 Aged for 96 hours at 70ºC 224% (min)

DIN 53505; ASTM D 2240; Original 78° Shore A (max)


Hardness AS1683.15.2; JIS K 6253 Aged for 96 hours at 70ºC Original +8° Shore A (max)
ASTM D 395 Method B; AS 1683.13 Method B;
Compression Set 22 hours at 70°C 30% (max)
BS903 A6; ISO 815; JIS K 6262
ASTM D 624 Die B; AS1683.12;
Tear Resistance Original 60kN/m (min)
BS ISO 34-1; JIS K 6252
DIN 53509; ASTM D 1149; AS 1683-24; 50pphm at 20% strain,
Ozone Resistance No cracks
BS ISO 1431-1; JIS K 6259 40°C, 100 hours
Hardness: ±10° Shore A (max)
Seawater Resistance BS ISO 1817; ASTM D 471 28 days at 95°C Volume: +10/-5% (max)
Abrasion ASTM D5963-04; BS ISO 4649 : 2002 Original 180mm3 (max)

* Material property certificates are issued for each different rubber grade on all orders for SCN Super Cone, SCK Cell Fender, Unit
Element, AN/ANP Arch, Cylindrical Fender, MV and MI Elements. Unless otherwise requested at time of order, material certificates
issued for other fender types are based on results of standard bulk and/or batch tests which form part of routine factory ISO9001
quality procedures and are for a limited range of physical properties (tensile strength, elongation at break and hardness).
† Dynamic fatigue testing is optional at extra cost.

‡ Grade 0 = no cracks (pass). Grade 1 = 10 or fewer pinpricks <0.5mm long (pass). Grades 2–10 = increasing crack size (fail).

© Trelleborg AB, 2008

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN
12–35

TOLERANCES
Trelleborg fenders are subject to standard manufacturing and performance tolerances.
For specific applications, smaller tolerances may be agreed on a case-by-case basis.

Fender type Dimension Tolerance


All dimensions ±3% or ±2mm*
Moulded fenders
Bolt hole spacing ±4mm (non-cumulative)
Cross-section ±3% or ±2mm*
Length ±2% or ±25mm*
Composite fenders
Drilled hole centres ±4mm (non-cumulative)
Counterbore depth ±2mm (under-head depth)
Block fenders Cross-section ±2% or ±2mm*
Cube fenders Length ±2% or ±10mm*
M fenders Fixing hole centres ±3mm
W fenders Fixing hole diameter ±3mm
Outside diameter ±4%
Cylindrical fenders Inside diameter ±4%
Length ±30mm
Cross-section ±4% or ISO 3302-E3*
Length ±30mm
Extruded fenders
Drilled hole centres ±4mm (non-cumulative)
Counterbore depth ±3mm (under-head depth)
Cross-section ±4%
Length ±2% or ±10mm*
HD-PE sliding fenders†
Drilled hole centres ±2mm (non-cumulative)
Counterbore depth ±2mm (under-head depth)
Length and width ±5mm (cut pads)
Length and width ±20mm (uncut sheets)
Thickness: ≤30mm ±0.2mm
(planed) 31–100mm ±0.3mm
≥101mm ±0.5mm
UHMW-PE face pads†
Thickness: ≤30mm ±2.5mm
(unplaned) 31–100mm ±4.0mm
≥101mm ±6.0mm
Drilled hole centres ±2mm (non-cumulative)
Counterbore depth ±2mm (under-head depth)
* Whichever is the greater dimension
† HD-PE and UHMW-PE dimensions are measured at 18°C and are subject to thermal expansion coefficients (see material properties)

Performance tolerances‡

Fender type Parameter Tolerance


SCN, SCK, UE, AN, ANP, MV and MI fenders Reaction, energy ±10%
Cylindricals (wrapped) Reaction, energy ±10%
Cylindricals (extruded) Reaction, energy ±20%
Extruded fenders Reaction, energy ±20%
Pneumatic fenders Reaction and energy ±10%
Block, cube, M, W, tug and workboat fenders Reaction ±10%
SeaGuard, SeaCushion and Donut fenders Reaction and energy ±15%
‡Performance tolerances apply to Rated Performance Data (RPD). They do not apply to energy and/or reaction at intermediate
deflections. The nominal rated deflection when RPD is achieved may vary and is provided for guidance only. Please consult Trelleborg
Marine Systems for performance tolerance on fender types not listed above.

© Trelleborg AB, 2008

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN
12–36

TESTING PROCEDURES
Trelleborg testing procedures for ‘solid-type’ rubber fenders comply with PIANC ‘Guidelines for the Design of Fender
Systems: 2002: Appendix A: Section 6: Verification/Quality Assurance Testing’. The Constant Velocity (CV) test method
is used for SCN, SCK, UE, AN/ANP and Cylindrical Fenders. MV and MI fenders are tested using the Decreasing Velocity
(DV) method on the dedicated Trelleborg high speed test press. All other fender types are tested on special request.

Compression Test Method Test Apparatus & Reporting


B All fenders will be given a unique manufacturing serial The test apparatus shall be equipped with a calibrated3
number for traceability. load cell system and linear transducer(s) for measuring
B Sampling is 1 in 10 fenders (rounded up to a unit) unless displacement. These will provide continuous real-time
otherwise agreed.1 monitoring of fender performance.
B No additional break-in cycles are carried out unless Test reports shall include the following as a minimum:
otherwise agreed.1 B Serial Number and description of test fender.
B Performance will be measured at 0° compression angle. B Date of test, name of test supervisor and signature of
B Readings shall be taken at intervals of between 0.01H to Quality Manager.
0.05H (where H = nominal fender height). B Table and graph of reaction (RVT) versus deflection and
B Fender temperature will be stabilised to 23°C ± 5°C for energy (EVT) versus deflection.
at least 24 hours before compression testing.
B Minimum temperature stabilisation time will be Pass Criteria4
calculated as tmin = 20x1.5 (where ‘x’ is the thickness of Fenders have passed verification testing if they meet the
the fender body in metres). following conditions:
B Stabilising time (tmin) can include the time taken for
‘break-in’ and ‘recovery’. RVT ≤ RRPD × 1.1 × VF × TF
B ‘Break in’ the fender by deflecting it three times to rated EVT ≥ ERPD × 0.9 × VF × TF
deflection.
B Remove load from the fender and allow ‘recovery’ for at Where,
least 1 hour. RVT = reaction from verification testing
B Stop testing when deflection reaches rated deflection or RRPD = Rated Performance Data
RPD2 is achieved. (or customer’s required reaction)
CV only: EVT = energy from verification testing
B Deflect the fender once at a constant deflection speed ERPD = Rated Performance Data
of 0.0003–0.0013m/s (2–8cm/min) and record reaction (or customer’s required energy)
and deflection. TF = Temperature factor when test sample is above
DV only: or below 23ºC ± 5ºC
B Deflect the fender once at a linearly-decreasing or CV only:
sinusoidally decreasing variable velocity with initial VF = velocity factor for actual test speed/time
velocity of 0.15m/s (or other speed as agreed) and final (or 1.0 unless otherwise stated)
velocity ≤0.005m/s. DV only:
VF = velocity factor for test speeds other than
Where testing of cylindrical, Arch, element and similar fenders 0.15m/s (or 1.0 unless otherwise stated)
over 2.0m long is required, please contact your local office to
discuss exact requirements.

Notes
1 Standard PIANC Verification Testing of 10% of fender order (rounded up to the nearest unit) is included within the
price for the fender types listed. Additional tests, third-party witnessing and special procedures will incur extra
charges. For load-sensitive structures, a single break-in deflection for all fenders with reaction of 100t or more is
included in the fender price if notified at the time of order.
2 Rated Performance Data (RPD) is defined in the relevant product sections of this catalogue.
3 All measuring equipment shall be calibrated and certified accurate to within ±1% in accordance with ISO or equivalent
JIS or ASTM requirements. Calibration shall be traceable to national/international standard and shall be performed
annually by an accredited third party organization.
4 Pass criteria as defined by PIANC ‘Guidelines for the Design of Fender Systems: 2002: Appendix A’. Deflection is not
considered to be a pass/fail criterion by PIANC. Non-compliant units will be clearly marked and segregated.

© Trelleborg AB, 2008

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN
12–37

PERFORMANCE TESTING
Trelleborg is committed to providing
high quality products. Consistency
and performance are routinely
checked in accordance with the
latest procedures and test protocols.
PIANC has introduced new
methods and procedures for
testing the performance of solid
rubber fenders, allowing for real
world operating conditions, in their
document ‘Guidelines for the
Design of Fender Systems: 2002:
Appendix A’.
Many of Trelleborg’s most popular
fender types are PIANC Type
Approved. This brings the following
benefits:

B proven product quality


B tests simulate real operating
conditions
B longer service life
B lower maintenance
B greater reliability Verification testing of SCK 3000
B reduced lifetime costs
B manufacturer commitment
B excludes unsafe ‘copy’ and ‘fake’ Testing is carried out in two stages: to prove behaviour of the generic fender
fenders type, and then to confirm that performance of fenders made for each project
B simplifies contract specifications meet the required performances.

Type Approval testing (Stage 1) Verification testing (Stage 2)


PIANC Type Approval testing is Verification testing using either CV
carried out to determine the effects method (all fender types except MV
of environmental factors on the and MI elements) or DV method
performance of various fender types. (MV and MI elements only) is
Trelleborg’s Type Approval tests are carried out on all significant orders
witnessed by Germanischer Lloyd. to confirm the Rated Performance
Super Cone, Unit Element, SCK Cell Data (RPD) of the fender. Results are
and Arch Fenders have been Type normalised to 0.15m/s compression
Approved to PIANC standards. speed, 23°C temperature and 0°
compression angle.

Note: Testing programmes for


foam, pneumatic, extruded,
composite, shear, and other
fender types are agreed with
customers on request and on a
case-by-case basis.

CV testing of SCN Super Cones DV testing of MV elements

© Trelleborg AB, 2008

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN
12–38

RATED PERFORMANCE DATA (RPD)

RPD is normalised to:


B 0.15m/s initial impact speed
RRP B 23°C temperature
B 0° compression angle.
n
io
ct
a
Re

ERP
y
Energ

Deflection d

Correction factors from type approved tests


VF
Impact speed 0.001m/s to 0.3m/s
Rubber is a visco-elastic material, meaning that reaction and energy are
affected by the speed of compression. Some rubbers are more affected by the 1.0
compression speed than others. RPD is normalised to 0.15m/s.
Vi
0.15m/s (VRP)

Temperature –30°C to +50°C TF


At low temperatures rubber becomes stiffer, which increases reaction forces.
At higher temperatures rubber softens, which reduces energy absorption.
RPD is normalised to 23°C. 1.0

T
23°C (TRP)

Compression angle 0° to 20° AF


Most fenders lose some energy absorption capacity when compressed at an
angle. RPD is normalised to 0°. 1.0

α
0°C (αRP)

Durability 3000 cycles minimum


To prove durability, fenders should be subjected to a long-term fatigue test of
at least 3000 cycles to rated deflection without failure. 1.0

To be meaningful, Type Approval testing should be monitored and witnessed by accredited third-party inspectors such as
Germanischer Lloyd. After successful Type Approval testing, the manufacturer should publish Rated Performance Data
(RPD) for their fenders along with correction factor tables for different velocities, temperatures and compression angles.

© Trelleborg AB, 2008

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN
12–39

PASS CRITERIA
Verification testing (or quality control testing) is carried out to prove the performance of fenders for each project in
accordance with catalogue RPD or other customer-specified values.
Samples from the project (usually 10% of the total quantity in each size and grade) are tested and the results obtained
are adjusted if necessary using the correction factor tables for initial impact speed and temperature.

Reaction force pass criteria

RRP x 1.1 FAIL


PASS
Reaction

RVT ≤ RRP × VF × TF × 1.1


Assuming a +10% manufacturing
tolerance on reaction.
Deflection d

Energy absorption pass criteria

ERP x 0.9 PASS


FAIL
Energy

EVT ≥ ERP × VF × TF × 0.9


Assuming a –10% manufacturing
tolerance on energy.
Deflection d

where,
RVT = reaction from verification testing
RRP = customer’s required reaction
EVT = energy from verification testing
ERP = customer’s required energy
VF = velocity factor for actual test speed
TF = temperature factor for actual test
temperature

© Trelleborg AB, 2008

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN
12–40

TYPE APPROVAL CERTIFICATES

© Trelleborg AB, 2008

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN
12–41

TYPE APPROVAL CERTIFICATES

© Trelleborg AB, 2008

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN
12–42

QUALITY DOCUMENTS
Customers should expect to receive appropriate documents to prove the quality of the fenders and accessories ordered.
A comprehensive document package might include:

Quality and environmental Fixing accessories


B Factory ISO 9001: 2000 quality management system B Mill certificates
B Factory ISO 14001: 2004 environmental management B Visual inspection report
system B Certificate of conformity

Literature and data sheets Chains


B Printed brochures or leaflets for the supplied products B Proof load test
B PIANC correction tables (where applicable) B Mill certificates (optional but recommended)
B PIANC Type Approval certificates (where applicable) B Galvanising certificate
B Dimensional inspection report (where applicable)
Performance tests B Certificate of conformity
B Verification test results and curves for each fender tested
B Third party witness certificate (optional but Low friction pads
recommended) B Dimensional inspection report
B Certificate of conformity B Certificate of conformity

Physical properties Other


B Laboratory report for hardness, tensile strength and B As built drawings
elongation at break, before and after ageing B Installation, operation and maintenance manual
B Durability test report (optional but recommended) B Inspection logbook
B Wear, tear and ozone resistance test reports B Warranty certificate
B Third party witness certificate (optional but B General certificate of conformity
recommended) B After-sales contact details
B Certificate of conformity

Steel fabrications
B Mill certificates
B Welder qualification certificates
B Weld procedures
B Dimensional check report (including flatness for panels)
B NDT inspection report – minimum 5% MPI (optional but
recommended)
B Pressure (leak) test inspection report
B Paint application report (temperature, humidity, dew point,
etc)
B Dry film thickness test report
B Certificate of conformity

The accuracy and authenticity of quality documents is very important. Trelleborg will provide an original or certified copy
of any third party report on request.

© Trelleborg AB, 2008

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN
12–43

CONVERSION TABLES
m ft in
Length m 1 3.281 39.37
Visit www.trelleborg.com/marine
ft 0.3048 1 12
in 0.0245 0.0833 1
to download a free units
conversion programme, ‘Convert’.
m2 ft2 in2 Registered visitors can find
Area m2 1 10.764 1550 Convert on the Technical menu
ft2 0.0929 1 144 after registering or logging in to
in2 645.2 × 10 -6 6.944 × 10 -3 1 the site.

m3 ft3 in3
Volume m3 1 35.315 61024
ft3 0.0283 1 1728
in3 16.387 × 10 -6 578.7 × 10 -6 1

tonne kip
Mass tonne 1 2.2046
kip 0.4536 1

kN tonne-f kip-f
Force kN 1 0.102 0.225
tonne-f 9.81 1 2.2046
kip-f 4.45 0.454 1

kNm tf-m kip-ft


Energy kNm 1 0.102 0.7376
tf-m 9.81 1 0.205
kip-ft 1.36 4.88 1 1kJ = 1kNm

kN/m2 t/m2 kip/ft2


Pressure kN/m2 1 0.102 0.0209
t/m2 9.81 1 0.205
kip/ft2 47.9 4.88 1 1ksf = 1kip/ft2

tonne/m3 kip/ft3
Density tonne/m3 1 0.0624
kip/ft3 16.018 1

N/mm2 psi
Stress N/mm2 1 145.04
psi 6.895 × 10 -3 1 1MPa = 1N/mm2

m/s ft/s km/h mph knot


Velocity m/s 1 3.2808 3.600 2.2369 1.9438
ft/s 0.3048 1 1.0973 0.6818 0.5925
km/h 0.2778 0.9113 1 0.6214 0.5400
mph 0.4470 1.4667 1.6093 1 0.8690
knot 0.5144 1.6878 1.8520 1.1508 1

g m/s2 ft/s2
Acceleration g 1 9.807 32.17
m/s2 0.102 1 3.281
ft/s2 6.895 × 10 -3 0.3048 1

degree radian
Angle degree 1 17.45 × 10 -3
radian 57.3 1

© Trelleborg AB, 2008

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN
12–44

CALCULATIONS

TRELLEBORG MARINE SYSTEMS


Project Prepared

Title Date

Client Ref Sheet Nº

www.trelleborg.com/marine

© Trelleborg AB, 2008

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN
12–45

CALCULATIONS

TRELLEBORG MARINE SYSTEMS


Project Prepared

Title Date

Client Ref Sheet Nº

www.trelleborg.com/marine

© Trelleborg AB, 2008

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN
12–46

Disclaimer
Trelleborg AB has made every effort to ensure that the technical specifications and product descriptions in this
catalogue are correct.
The responsibility or liability for errors and omissions cannot be accepted for any reason whatsoever. Customers are
advised to request a detailed specification and certified drawing prior to construction and manufacture. In the interests
of improving the quality and performance of our products and systems, we reserve the right to make specification
changes without prior notice. All dimensions, material properties and performance values quoted are subject to normal
production and testing tolerances. This catalogue supersedes the information provided in all previous editions. If in
doubt, please check with Trelleborg Marine Systems.

© Trelleborg AB, PO Box 153, 231 22 Trelleborg, Sweden.


This catalogue is the copyright of Trelleborg AB and may not be reproduced, copied or distributed to third parties without
the prior consent of Trelleborg AB in each case.
Fentek, Rubbylene and Orkot are Registered Trade Marks of Trelleborg AB.

Designed by Harrison Sigala


(www.harrisonsigala.com)

© Trelleborg AB, 2008

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN
12–47

Four business areas

Trelleborg Engineered Systems


Trelleborg is a global industrial group whose is a leading global supplier of
leading positions are based on advanced polymer engineered solutions that focus on
the sealing, protection and safety
technology and in-depth applications know-how. of investments, processes and
individuals in extremely demanding
We develop high-performance solutions that environments.

seal, damp and protect in demanding industrial


environments.
The Group has annual sales of approximately
€3 billion, with about 24,000 employees in 40
countries. The head office is located in Trelleborg,
Sweden. Trelleborg Automotive is a world-
leader in the development and
Trelleborg AB was founded in 1905. With 100 production of polymer-based
components and systems used for
years behind us, our history, like our future, is noise and vibration damping for
characterised by a constant drive for quality and passenger car and light and heavy
trucks.
a passion for identifying new solution to complex
problems.

Trelleborg Sealing Solutions is a


leading global supplier of precision
seals for the industrial, aerospace
and automotive markets.

In 2005, the Trelleborg Group celebrated its centenary. To us, Trelleborg Wheel Systems is a
quality is a state of mind. We adopt an in-depth approach to each leading global supplier of tires
problem, aiming for long-term solutions. and complete wheel systems for
Yesterday’s and today’s innovations, know-how and quality form the farm and forest machinery, forklift
trucks and other materials-handling
foundation of tomorrow. vehicles.

© Trelleborg AB, 2008

M1100-S12-V1.2-EN
Americas Japan
Tel: +1 540 667 5191
tms.americas@trelleborg.com
Tel: +81 3 3512 1981 Presented by
tms.japan@trelleborg.com

Asia
Tel: +65 6268 8005 Middle East
tms.asia@trelleborg.com Tel: +971 4 886 1825
tms.middleeast@trelleborg.com
Australia
Tel: +61 2 9285 0200
tms.australia@trelleborg.com Scandinavia
Tel: +46 410 51 667
Benelux tms.scandinavia@trelleborg.com
Tel: +31 180 434040
tms.benelux@trelleborg.com Spain
Tel: +34 945 437 906
Central Asia tms.spain@trelleborg.com
Tel: +91 79 4003 8700
tms.india@trelleborg.com
UK
France Tel: +44 1666 827660
Tel: +33 1 41 39 22 20 tms.uk@trelleborg.com
tms.france@trelleborg.com

Germany Harbour Marine


Tel: +49 40 600 4650 Tel: +61 3 9575 9999
tms.germany@trelleborg.com sales@harbourmarine.com

www.trelleborg.com/marine
tms@trelleborg.com
Ref. M1100-V1.2-EN

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen